Canon ImageRUNNER 5000 User Guide

E82_US.book Page 1 Tuesday, May 22, 2001 12:11 AM

User’s GuideSeries

imageRUNNER 5000 Series


PREFACEThank you for purchasing the Canon imageRUNNER 5000 Series. This Manual describes the method of using the imageRUNNER 5000 Series, its Copy and Mail Box functions, and the parts that are common to each function.Please read this manual thoroughly before operating the imageRUNNER 5000 Series in order to familiarize yourself with its capabilities, and to make the most of its many functions. After reading this manual store it in a safe place for future reference.

CAUTION:In this manual, CAUTION MESSAGES with this symbol indicate that neglecting the suggested procedure or practice could result in personal injury.

NOTICE:Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this manual is free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, as we are constantly improving our products, some of the data contained herein may not exactly reflect the current model of the particular product with which this manual has been included. If you have a need for an exact specification, please contact Canon for the current specification.This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright. All rights are reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated into another language without prior written consent of Canon Inc.

Copyright ©2000 Canon Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

International Energy Star-Program

As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Canon USA, Inc. has determined that this copier model meets the ENERGY STAR® Program for energy efficiency.

The International ENERGY STAR® Office Equipment Program is an international program that promotes energy saving through the use of computers and other office equipment. The program backs the development and dissemination of products with functions that effectively reduce energy consumption. It is an open system in which business proprietors can participate voluntarily. The targeted products are office equipment such as computers, displays, printers, facsimiles, and copiers. Their standards and logos are uniform among participating nations.

Note:This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the Operator’s Manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.

2


How This Manual is Organized

Before You Start Using This MachineThis chapter describes the name and function of each part of the machine, and also themethod of placing an original after switching ON the machine.

Basic CopyingThis chapter describes the basic copy functions.

Useful Copy FunctionsThis chapter describes more advanced copy functions.

Using the Mail Box FunctionsThis chapter describes the Mail Box functions that enable you to temporarily store or printdata.

Printing EfficientlyThis chapter describes how to make the next copy, or a print from another function, while aprint is being made, how to check the printing status, and how to change or cancel printing.

Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your NeedsThis chapter describes the default settings and how to change them to suit your needs.

Loading Paper and Adding TonerThis chapter describes how to load paper and add toner.

TroubleshootingThis chapter describes what to do when there is a paper jam or a problem with print quality.

Handling OptionsThis chapter describes the use of options and what to do if there is a paper jam in anoptional unit.

Operation When User Restrictions are Enabled and How toEnter Alphabet Characters

This chapter describes how to use the Control Card, enter characters, etc.

AppendixThis chapter describes the specifications of this machine and optional units, index, etc.

Some information in this manual is also relevant when using the Printer functions etc. of the imageRUNNER 5000 Series. Please use this manual in combination with the other manuals (printer manual etc.) when using the printer functions.

CHAPTER

CHAPTER

CHAPTER

CHAPTER

CHAPTER

CHAPTER

CHAPTER

CHAPTER

CHAPTER

CHAPTER

CHAPTER

How This Manual is Organized 3


Safety Information
A. Laser SafetyThis Product complies with 21 CFR Chapter 1 Subchapter J as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard accord-ing to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the Product does not produce hazardous laser radiation.Since radiation emitted inside the Product is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam can not escape from the machine during any phase of user opera-tion.
B. CDRH RegulationsThe Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The label shown below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.

CAUTION• Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in the man-

ual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

DANGER: INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.

VORSICHT: UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENNABDECKUNG GEÖFNET UNDSICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG ÜERBRÜKTNICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.

CAUTION: INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN.AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.

ATTENTION: RAYONNEMENT LASER EN CASD’OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSEAU FAISCEAU.

CANON INC.3-30-2 SHIMOMARUKO, OHTA-KU, TOKYO, JAPANCANON U.S.A., INCONE CANON PLAZA, LAKE SUCCESS, N.Y. 11042, U.S.A.CANON CANADA INC.6390 DIXIE ROAD MISSISSAUGA, ONTARIO L5T, 1P7, CANADAMANUFACTURED:THIS PRODUCT CONFORMS WITH DHHS RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARD, 21 CFR CHAPTER 1 SUBCHAPTER J.

Safety Information4


Functions of This Machine and Related Manuals
This machine can also be used in a network or as a printer, when the Network Multi-PDL Printer Kit (option) is attached. Refer to the instruction manual for the relevant function as well as this manual.
IMPORTANT• You can use the Remote UI when the Network Multi-PDL Printer Kit is attached.• The Printer function may be attached as standard depending on the system configuration.

The manuals supplied with option equipment are included in the list above.Depending on the system configuration and product purchased, some manuals may be unavailable (irrelevant).Specifications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release.

How to Use this MachineTroubleshooting

User’s Guide(This Document)

Remote UI GuideFor Remote UI Use

Setup GuideFor setting up the network connection & installing the CD-ROM software

PS/PCL Reference GuideFor Postscript/PCL Use

PCL Driver Guide

PS Driver GuideFor Installing the Printer Driver, etc

For Installing the Printer Driver, etc

Network GuideFor Connecting and Setting the Network

Functions of This Machine and Related Manuals 5


Operation of the Machine and Terms Used in This Manual
This machine makes effective use of a memory in order to perform print operations efficiently. For example, as soon as the machine has scanned the original that you want to copy, it can scan the next person’s original to make a copy without any need to wait. You can also print from this machine by using a function other than the Copy function. In this machine, these operations take place in a complex way, so not only copies but also various kinds of prints may sometimes have to wait their turn before they can be output.To avoid confusion when reading this manual, the terms “scanning”, “printing” and “copying” used in this manual are defined as set out below. There are some cases in which the scanning of an original when making a copy, and the process of making a print are described separately.
Scanning:

Scanning an original to be copied, or scanning an original to be stored as data in a box.

Printing:

Copying:Printing data scanned from an original, followed by finishing (stapling, etc.).

Outputting a copy, outputting data stored in a box, or outputting data sent from a personal computer to the machine.

Operation of the Machine and Terms Used in This Manual6


Table of Contents
How This Manual is Organized. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Functions of This Machine and Related Manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Operation of the Machine and Terms Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Symbols Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Maintenance and Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Warning Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Periodic Inspection of the Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Avoid Installing the Machine in the Following Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Select a Safe Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Provide Adequate Installation Space. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Moving the Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Legal Limitations on Scanner Usage and the Use and Printing of Scanned Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Various Kinds of Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33You can Store Data and Print it at Your Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40You can Check, Change, and Cancel the Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Setting the Specifications According to the Method of Use. . . . . . . . . . . 43Displaying a Guide Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44You can Read the Messages From the System Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Functions that Conserve Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Energy Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Low-Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Quiet Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Daily Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Other Useful Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Auto Drawer Switching Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Auto Clear Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Copy Waiting Time Display Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Paper Supply Indicator Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Paper Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Table of Contents 7


Chapter 1 Before You Start Using This Machine

Parts and Their Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2External View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Internal View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4Control Panel Parts and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4

Main Power and Control Panel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6Control Panel Power Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8

Using the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9Frequently-used Keys on the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9Touch Panel Key Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10Adjusting the Brightness of the Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10

Placing Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11Orientation of Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12Placing an Original on the Platen Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13Placing Originals in the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15

Available Paper Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17

Chapter 2 Basic Copying

Flow of Copy Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

Canceling a Copy Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Canceling from the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Canceling with the Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7

Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9Automatic Paper Selection (Auto) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9Manual Paper Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Enlarging/ Reducing Originals to a Standard Size (Preset Zoom). . . . .2-16Specifying the Copy Ratio by % (Zoom Designation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Automatically Setting the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper Sizes (Auto) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the Original Periphery from Being Cut (Entire Image) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Calculating the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper Sizes (Zoom Program) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Enlarging/Reducing Originals with Copy Ratios Set Independently for X and Y Axes (XY Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28

Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Adjusting Copy Exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Selecting Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Automatic Adjustment of Exposure and Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35

Stop

8 Table of Contents


Entering the Copy Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36Specifying the Required Number of Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36Changing the Copy Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38Making Two-sided Copies from One-sided Originals (1 2-Sided) . . . . . 2-38Making Two-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2 2-Sided) . . . . . 2-40Making One-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2 1-Sided) . . . . . 2-43Making Two-sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book (Book 2-Sided). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Collating Copies (Finisher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48

Checking a Sample Set Before Copying (Sample Set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

Checking the Copy Mode Settings (Setting Confirmation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56

Changing or Canceling a Selected Copy Mode (Setting Confirmation/Cancel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57

Chapter 3 Useful Copy Functions

Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Copy Sheets (Two-page Separation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages to Copy Sets (Cover/Sheet Insertion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between Transparencies (Transparency Interleaving). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Making Copies with Original Image Shifted (Shift) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Making Copies with Original Image Shifted to the Center or a Corner . 3-17Making Copies with Original Image Using the Numeric Keys . . . . . . . . 3-18

Making Copies with Margins (Margin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase) . . . . . . . . . 3-24Making Copies Erasing the Frame of the Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Making Copies Erasing the Book Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Making Copies Erasing Binding holes etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet (Image Combination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section on a Separate Copy Sheet (Image Separation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Feeding Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

Storing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Storing Copy Settings for a Copy Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48Storing a Memory Key Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51Recalling a Copy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53Erasing a Copy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

9Table of Contents


Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-58

Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-60

Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeat) . . . . . . .3-62

Making Copies with Image Reversed (Mirror Image). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-65

Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-67

Chapter 4 Using the Mail Box Functions

Flow of Mail Box Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3Storing Originals in the Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3Printing Documents Stored in the Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6

Scanning Originals into a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9Giving a Name to the Document to be Scanned (Document Name) . . . .4-9Specifying Document Size (Doc. Size Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10Adjusting the Exposure and Image Quality before Scanning the Originals (Scanning Exposure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11Changing the Scanning Ratio (Copy Ratio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15Scanning Two-sided Originals (Two-sided Original) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25Scanning Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Sheets in One Step (Two-page Separation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27Scanning Originals for Use as a Booklet (Booklet Scanning) . . . . . . . .4-28Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines (Frame Erase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Print Sheet and Storing it (Image Combination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39Scanning Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43Scanning Originals Separately Set as One Document (Job Build) . . . .4-45Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47Scanning Originals after Making them Sharply Contrasted (Sharpness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49Storing/ Recalling Scanning Modes (Mode Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51

Printing a Document Stored, in a Box after Changing the Settings . . .4-61Selecting the Print Paper Size (Paper Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-61Collating Prints (Finisher). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-63Two-sided Printing (Two-sided Printing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-67Adding Job Separator Sheets, Front and Back Covers to Printed Sets (Cover/Job Separator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-69Making Prints for Use as a Booklet (Booklet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72Printing Multiple Documents as One Document (Merge Documents) . .4-75Storing/ Recalling Often Used Print Setting in Memory (Mode Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77

Checking the Print Result or the Image of the Stored Docu-ment (Sample Print). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-88

Checking the Document’s Detailed Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-90

Changing the Name of a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-91

Moving a Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-93

10 Table of Contents


Erasing a Document from a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

Chapter 5 Printing Efficiently

Changing the Exposure During Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies (Interrupt Mode). 5-3

Reserving a Job while the Machine is Warming Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Making a Copy Reservation while the Machine is Warming Up (Auto Start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Reserving a Print Job of a Document Stored in a Box while the Machine is Warming Up (Auto Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Reserving the Next Job during Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Reserving a Copy Operation during Printing (Reserve Copy) . . . . . . . . . 5-7Reserving a Box Print while Printing (Reserve Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Checking and Changing Printing Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Checking Detailed Information for Printing Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Canceling Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15Priority Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Operating Print Jobs Sent from a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Printing Secured Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Checking and Canceling Spool Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Checking the Printing History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Checking the Device Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Chapter 6 Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs

Additional Functions Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Selecting the Initial Function at Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Selecting the Default Display After Auto Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Setting Entry Tone, Error Tone, Job Done Tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Setting Inch Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/ Auto Drawer Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12Changing the Energy Saver Mode Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14Setting the Functions Keys as keys to Reactivate the Machine . . . . . . 6-15Setting the Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15Distinguishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16Setting a Dedicated Tray for Each Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17Setting the Printing Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19Setting a Standard Mode for Local Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

11Table of Contents


Setting the Timer (Timer Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24Setting the Current Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24Setting the Time to Initiate Auto Sleep after Finishing Operations. . . . .6-26Setting the Time Taken for Display to Return to Basic Screen after Finishing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-27Setting the Time Taken for the Unit to Quiet Down after Last Task . . . .6-28Setting the Time That the Unit’s Power Turns OFF on Different Days of the Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29Setting the Low-Power Mode Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-30

Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-31Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original Image and Print Image Occur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-31Staple Repositioning for Saddle Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-32Changing the Saddle Stitch Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33Adjusting the Standard Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-34

Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Copy Settings). . . . . . . .6-35Setting Standard Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-35Setting Automatic Collate On/ Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37Setting Image Orientation Priority to On/ Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-38Setting the Job Duration Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-39Setting Auto Orientation to On/ Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-40Setting the Photo Mode of the Copy Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-41Changing the Current Standard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-42Restoring Settings to Default Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45

Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (Mail Box Settings) . .6-46Setting/ Storing the Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-46Initializing a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-49Setting the Photo Mode of the Mail Box Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-51Setting the Standard mode for Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52

Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-55

Setting/ Changing the System Manager ID and Password . . . . . . . . . .6-55Setting the Department ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-58Setting Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-72Erasing a Message Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-73Setting the Auto Offline On/Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-74

Printing the Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-75Printing the Contents of the Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-75

Chapter 7 Loading Paper and Adding Toner

Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2Loading Paper in the Paper Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6

Adding Toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8

Consumables and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12



Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

Chapter 8 Troubleshooting

Removing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Removing Paper Jams in the Main Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Removing Paper Jams in the Right Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 3 or 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Removing Paper Jams in the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20Removing Paper Jams in the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

Routine Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25Cleaning the Platen Glass/ Rear Side of Platen Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25Cleaning the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26Original Scanned Using the Feeder Becomes Dirty (Feeder Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30Output Sheets are Dirty (Wire Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31

Self-diagnostic (Error) Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32

If Memory Becomes Full During Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35

When the Power does not Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36

Service Call Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37

Chapter 9 Handling Options

System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Paper Deck-G1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Removing Paper Jams in the Paper Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Loading Paper in the Paper Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Collate Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Group Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Offset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Staple Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Saddle Stitching Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Punch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Removing Paper Jams in the Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Replacing the Staple Case in the Stapler Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Removing Jammed Staples from the Stapler Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Removing Paper Jams in the Saddle Stitcher Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Replacing the Saddle Stitcher Unit Staple Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Removing Jammed Staples from the Saddle Stitcher Unit . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Removing Paper Jams in the Puncher Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

13Table of Contents


Removing Punch Waste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33

Copy Tray-C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34Removing Paper Jams in the Copy Tray-C3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35

Chapter 10 Operation When User Restrictions are Enabled and How to Enter Alphabet Characters

Operation When User Restrictions Are Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Inserting the Control Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Operations before Using Copy or Mail Box Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3Operations after Using Copy or Mail Box Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Entering the Department ID and Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4Operations after Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4Operations after Using Copy Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5

Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6Entering Alphabet Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6Entering Special Letters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7

Setting in Inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8

Chapter 11 Appendix

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5Paper Deck-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-6Puncher Unit-B1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8Copy Tray-C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8Card Reader-C1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-8

Relation of Original Orientation and Paper Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . .11-9

Chart of Available Combination of Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10Copy Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10Mail Box Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15



How to Use This Manual
The descriptions in this manual are presented using the following general format.
1 Section Title2 Chapter Title3 Description of modes and examples of

output

4 IMPORTANTIndicates operational warnings. Be certain to read these items so that you operate the machine correctly.

5 Subsection Title6 Operation Instructions

Numbered steps describe how to set and operate various functions.

7 ReferencePage and chapter numbers containing related items are provided.

8 NOTEIndicates notes for operation or additional explanations. Reading these is recommended.

9 IllustrationsIllustrations to help you identify keys and parts of the machine.

The above sample page does not actually exist in this manual.

11

Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book (Two-page Separation)This feature enables you to copy facing pages in a book or magazine on separate sheets of paper.

• Place the original on the platen glass. You cannot place the original in the feeder and copy it in the Two-page Separation mode.

• In the Two-page Separation mode, combined use with the Saddle Stitch, Two-sided, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Different Size Originals, Image Combination, Image Separation, and Image Repeat modes cannot be set.

• When copying facing pages with the two-sided mode, copy them with the Book 2-Sided mode. (See “Making Two-sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book (Book 2-Sided),” on p. 2-45.)

1 Place your original on the platen glass and press the [Special Features] key.

2 Press the [Two-page Separation] key.

3-2 Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book (Two-page Separation)

Original Copy

• If you want to make copies in page order, begin copying from the first pages and work your way forward.

• Place the original face down so that the original’s top edge is against the back edge of the platen glass.

IMPORTANT

NOTE

Copying Facing Pages onto Two Separate Sheets

3 U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions

(See “Placing Originals,” on p.1-11.)

ABC

1

3

4

5

9

2

678

How to Use This Manual 15


Symbols Used in This Manual

When multiple keys which should be operated are displayed in a touch panel display, all keys are marked. Select the key which suit your needs.

WARNING

CAUTION

NOTE

IMPORTANT

Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. In order to use the machine safely, always pay attention to these warnings.

Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons or damage to property if not performed correctly. In order to use the machine safely, always pay attention to these cautions.

Indicates operational warnings and restrictions. Be certain to read these items to operate the machine correctly, and to avoid damage to the machine.

Indicates notes for operation or additional explanations. Reading these is recommended.

The following symbols, key names and unit names are used in this manual.

Unless otherwise mentioned, screenshots of the touch panel display and illustrations used in this manual are those taken when the Saddle Finisher-F2, and the Paper Deck-G1 are attached to the imageRUNNER 5000.Note that functions that cannot be used depending on the model or options are not displayed in the touch panel display.

Key on control panel Key on touch panel display [OK] keyStart

key

The keys which are to be operated are marked with as shown below in this manual.

Symbols Used in This Manual16


Safety Considerations
Installation
WARNING• Do not install the machine near alcohol, paint

thinner or other inflammable substances. If inflammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.

• Do not place the following items on the machine. If these items come into contact with a high-volt-age area inside the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.- Necklaces and other metal objects- Cups, vases, flowerpots and other containers

filled with water or liquidsIf these items are dropped or spilled inside the machine, immediately turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the power plug from the out-let. Then, contact your service representative.

CAUTION• Do not install the machine in unstable locations

such as on unsteady platforms or on inclined floors, or in locations which are subject to exces-sive vibrations, as this may cause the machine to fall or tip over, resulting in personal injury.

• Do not install the machine in such a way that the ventilation ports are blocked by objects. If the ventilation ports are blocked, heat will build up inside the machine and may result in a fire.

• Do not place heavy objects on the machine, as they may tip over or fall resulting in personal injury.

Safety Considerations 17


• Do not install the machine in the following loca-tions.- A damp or dusty location- A location which is exposed to direct sunlight- A location subject to high temperatures- A location that is subject to open flames

• Do not remove the machine’s fixing stoppers after the machine has been installed, as this may cause the machine to fall or tip over, resulting in personal injury.

Power Supply

WARNING• Do not damage or modify the power cord. Also,

do not place heavy objects on the power cord, or pull on or excessively bend it, as this could cause electrical damage and result in a fire or electrical shock.

• Do not insert or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as this may result in electrical shock.

18 Safety Considerations


• Do not plug the machine into a multi-plug power strip, as this may cause a fire or electrical shock.

• Do not bundle up or tie the power cord in a knot, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.

• Insert the power cord completely into the outlet, as failure to do so may result in a fire or electrical shock.

• Do not use power cords other than the provided power cord, as this may result in a fire or electri-cal shock.

• As a general rule, do not use extension cords. Using an extension cord may result in a fire or electrical shock. If an extension cord must be used, however, untie the cord binding and insert the power plug completely into the extension cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between the power and extension cords.

19Safety Considerations


• If the breaker drops to the OFF position when you turn ON the power switch or when the copier is already ON, do not push the breaker back to the ON position. Doing so may lead to a fire, elec-trical shock, smoke, or the tripping of other breakers in the facility. When this happens, unplug the power plug immediately and contact your service representative.

CAUTION• Do not use power supplies with voltages other

than 120 V AC, as this may result in a fire or elec-trical shock.

• Always grasp the plug portion when unplugging the power plug. Pulling on the power cord may expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise dam-age the power cord. If the cord is damaged, this could cause an electricity leak and result in a fire or electrical shock.

• Leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can be unplugged easily. If objects are placed around the power plug, you will be unable to unplug it in an emergency.

Handling

WARNING• Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the

machine. There are high-temperature and high-voltage components inside the machine which may result in a fire or electrical shock.

ON




• If the machine makes strange noises, or emits smoke, heat or unusual smells, immediately turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the power plug from the outlet. Then, contact your service representative. Continued use of the machine in this condition may result in a fire or electrical shock.

• Do not use highly flammable sprays near the machine. If gas from these sprays comes into contact with the electrical components inside the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.

• When moving the machine, first turn OFF the power switch, and then unplug the power plug. Failure to do so will damage the power cord which may cause a fire or electrical shock.

• Do not drop paper clips, staples or other metal objects inside the machine. Also, do not spill water, liquids or flammable substances (alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, etc.) inside the machine. If these items come into contact with a high-volt-age area inside the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical shock. If these items are dropped or spilled inside the machine, immediately turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the power plug from the socket. Then, contact your service representative.

CAUTION• Close the Feeder gently to avoid catching your

hand, as this may result in personal injury.


• Do not touch the Finisher while the machine is printing, as this may result in personal injury.

• Turn OFF the power switch for safety when the machine will not be used for a long period of time such as overnight. Also, unplug the power plug for safety when the machine will not be used for an extended period of time such as during con-secutive holidays.

• Do not place your hand in the part of the tray where stapling is performed while a Finisher is attached, as this may result in personal injury.

Maintenance and Inspections

WARNING• When cleaning the machine, first turn OFF the

main power switch and unplug the power plug. Failure to observe these steps may result in a fire or electrical shock.

• Clean the machine using a firmly wrung-out cloth dampened with a mild cleansing detergent. Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner or other flammable substances. If flammable substances come into contact with a high-voltage area inside the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.



• Do not throw used toner bottles into open flames, as this may ignite the toner remaining inside the bottles and result in burns or a fire.

CAUTION• Unplug the power plug from the outlet at least

once a year, and clean the area around the base of the plug’s metal pins to ensure all dust is removed. If dust accumulates in this area, it may result in a fire.

• There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high voltages and high tempera-tures. Take adequate precautions when perform-ing internal inspections to avoid burns or electrical shock.

• The simbol inside the machine indicates that the area is subject to high temperature, and not to be touched without care.

• When removing jammed paper or when inspect-ing the inside of the machine, do not allow neck-laces, bracelets or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.

• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing with warm water will set the toner and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.

• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and entering your eyes or mouth. If toner enters your eyes or mouth, wash immedi-ately with cold water and consult a physician.



• When loading paper or removing jammed origi-nals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the original or paper.

• When removing used toner bottles from the toner supply port, remove the bottles carefully to pre-vent toner from scattering and entering your eyes or mouth. If toner enters your eyes or mouth, wash immediately with cold water and consult a physician.

Consumables

WARNING• Do not throw toner bottles into open flames, as

this may cause the toner to ignite and result in burns or a fire.

• Do not store toner bottles or paper in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause the toner or paper to ignite and result in burns or a fire.

• When discarding the toner bottles, put the bot-tles in a bag to prevent the toner from scattering, and dispose of it as a non-flammable.

CAUTION• Keep toner and other consumables out of the

reach of small children. If these items are ingested, consult a physician immediately.



Warning IndicationsCAUTION

• The laser unit inside the machine emits laser light. Under no circumstances open the cover of the laser unit or remove the label attached to the cover. If the laser light escapes from the machine, exposure may cause serious damage to your eyes.

DANGER- Laser radiation when open and interlock defeated.AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.

DANGER- Laser radiation when open.AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.





Periodic Inspection of the Breaker
This machine has a breaker that detects excess current or leakage current.Be sure to test the breaker once or twice a month using the following procedure.
IMPORTANT• Make sure that the main power is turned ON, and the machine is neither printing nor scanning before

starting periodic inspection of the breaker.• If a malfunction occurs after a periodic inspection, contact your service representative.

1 Press the test button located at the bottom left of this machine.

NOTE• Push the test button with the tip of the ball-point

pen, etc.• For details of the location of the breaker when the

Finisher is attached, see “Internal View,” on p. 1-3.

2 The breaker lever automatically goes to OFF (“ ” side). Confirm that the power is cut OFF.

IMPORTANT• Do not use the test button to turn the power ON

and OFF.• If the breaker lever does not go to OFF (“ ”

side), repeat step 1.• If the breaker lever does not go to OFF (“ ”

side) despite carrying out the above procedure two or three times, contact your service repre-sentative.

3 Once you confirmed that the above operation takes place, press the main power switch to OFF (“ ” side).

Periodic Inspection of the Breaker26


4 Move the breaker lever to ON (“ I ” side).

5 Press the main power switch to ON (“ I ” side)

6 Fill in the check sheet for the periodic inspection of the breaker at the end of this manual.

27Periodic Inspection of the Breaker


Installation Precautions
Avoid Installing the Machine in the Following Locations
• Avoid locations which are subject to low temperatures and low humidity, or high temperatures and high humidity.For example, avoid installing the machine near water faucets, hot water heaters, humidifiers, air conditioners, heaters and stoves.

• Avoid installing the machine in the direct sunlight.If unavoidable, shade the machine using cur-tains.

• Avoid poorly ventilated locations.During use, the machine generates ozone. However, the amount of ozone generated is not enough to affect the human body. Neverthe-less, if the machine is used for a prolonged period of time in a poorly ventilated room, or when making a large quantity of prints, be sure to ventilate the room to make the working envi-ronment as comfortable as possible.

• Avoid locations where a considerable amount of dust accumulates.

Installation Precautions28


• Avoid locations where ammonia gas is emitted.

• Avoid locations near volatile flammables, such as alcohol or paint thinner.

• Avoid locations which are subject to vibra-tions.For example, avoid installing the machine on unstable floors or stands.

• Avoid rapid changes in temperature.If the room in which the machine is installed is rapidly heated from a low temperature, con-densation may form inside the machine. This can adversely affect print quality or result in an inability to obtain print images.

• Avoid installing the machine near comput-ers or other precision electronic equipment.Electrical interference and vibrations generated by the machine during printing can adversely affect the operation of such equipment.

• Avoid installing the machine near televi-sions, radios or other similar electronic equipment.The machine might interfere with sound and picture signal reception, etc. Plug the machine into a dedicated power outlet and maintain as much space as possible between the machine and other electronic equipment.

• About the machine’s fixing stoppers.- Do not remove the machine’s fixing stoppers after

the machine has been installed.- If you put weight on the front of the machine while

the paper drawers or units within the machine are pulled out all the way, the machine might fall for-ward. To prevent this from happening, make sure that the machine’s fixing stoppers are set in place.

29Installation Precautions


Select a Safe Power Supply• Plug the machine into a 120V AC outlet.• Do not plug other electrical equipment into the outlet to which the machine is con-nected.

• Do not plug the machine into a multi-plug power strip. Doing so might cause a fire.

• The power cable may become damaged if it is often stepped on or heavy objects are placed on it. Continued use of a damaged power cable can lead to an accident.

Provide Adequate Installation Space• Provide enough space on each side of the machine for unrestricted operation.

Moving the Machine• If you intend to move the machine, contact your service representative beforehand.

■ When the Paper Deck-G1, the Saddle Finisher-F2, and the Puncher Unit-B1 are attached.(Each option in extended condition)

■ When the Copy Tray-C3 is attached.

29-1

/4"

(743

mm

)

49"

(1,2

44 m

m)

52-5/8" (1,335 mm)

29-1

/4"

(743

mm

)

49"

(1,2

44 m

m)

85-1/8" (2,162 mm)

more than 2-3/8" (60 mm) more than 2-3/8" (60 mm)

30 Installation Precautions


Handling Precautions
• Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the machine.
• Some parts inside the machine are subject to high voltages and temperatures. Take adequate precaution when inspecting the inside of the machine. Do not carry out any inspections not described in this manual.

• Be careful not to drop any foreign objects such as paper clips or staples inside the machine. If a foreign object comes into con-tact with electrical parts inside the machine, it might cause a short circuit and result in a fire or an electrical shock.

• If there is unusual noise or smoke, immedi-ately turn the main power switch OFF, then call your service representative. Using the machine in this state might cause a fire or an electric shock. Also, avoid placing objects around the plug so that the machine can be unplugged whenever nec-essary.

• Do not turn the main power switch OFF or open the front door during the operation. This might result in paper jams.

• To avoid danger of ignition, do not use flam-mable aerosol products near the machine.

• If the machine will not be used for a pro-longed period of time, for example during the night, turn the main power switch OFF.

• There may be an accident or a defect with the hard disk in the machine, causing loss, destruc-tion or alternation of data received or stored on the hard disk. You are recommended not to store data on the hard disk without having copies or print-outs of such data outside.

CAUTION• CANON RECOMMENDS THAT DATA STORED ON THE PROD-

UCT’S HARD DISK DRIVE BE DUPLICATED OR BACKED UP TO PREVENT ITS LOSS IN THE EVENT OF FAILURE OR OTHER MALFUNCTION OF THE HARD DISK DRIVE. NEITHER CANON NOR ANY SERVICE PROVIDER WILL BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF DATA STORED ON THE PRODUCT’S HARD DISK DRIVE (SEE THE TERMS OF THE PRODUCT’S LIMITED WARRANTY FOR MORE DETAILS).

Handling Precautions 31


Legal Limitations on Scanner Usage and the Use and Printing of Scanned Images
Using your Scanner to reproduce certain documents, and the printing and use of such reproduc-tions, may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal and/or civil liability. A non-exhaustive list of these document is set forth below. This list is intended to be a guide only. If you are uncertain of the legality of using your Scanner to reproduce any particular document, and/or the printing and use of such reproductions, you should consult in advance with your legal advisor for guidance.
● Paper money● Travelers Cheques● Money Orders● Food Stamps● Certificates of Deposit● Passports● Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)● Immigration Papers● Identifying badges or insignias● Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)● Selective Service or draft papers● Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness● Checks or drafts drawn by Governmental agencies● Stock Certificates● Motor Vehicle Licenses and Certificates of Title● Copyrighted Works/Works of Art without Permission of Copyright Owner

Legal Limitations on Scanner Usage and the Use and Printing of Scanned Images

32


What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do
Most operations for using this machine are done from the touch panel display. By pressing the keys following the messages in the touch panel display, you can utilize the functions of this machine.
Various Kinds of CopiesBasic Features Screen

The screen below, which appears when the machine is ready to make copies, is called the Basic Features screen.

Job/Print monitor areaDisplays the current status of the copy job or other functions.

Press to make copies at a different copy ratio. (See “Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio),” on p. 2-16.)

Press to select the paper and the feeding posi-tion of the paper. (See “Selecting the Copy Pa-per Size (Paper Select),” on p. 2-9.)

What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do 33


Press to select or cancel Collate, Group, or Staple collate modes. (See “Collating Copies (Finisher),” on p. 2-48.)•When you select the [Collate] key.

12

34

R E P O R T

1

R E P O R T

1

R E P O R T

1

R E P O R T

1

R E P O R T

Press to select or cancel the Two-sided mode. You can copy one-sided/ two-sided originals and facing pages of an original, such as books, on both the front and back sides of the paper, and make one-sided copies from two-sided originals. (See “Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Mode),” on p. 2-38.)•When you select the [1 2-Sided] key.

Press the [Light] or [Dark] key to manually con-trol the copy exposure. Press the [A] key to se-lect or cancel Auto Exposure Control. (See “Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Ex-posure),” on p. 2-32.)

SCENE SCENESCENE

Press to copy originals specifying the image quality (text only, text and photo, photo only). You can also select the type of photo (printed image/photo) when you set the photo mode in the Additional Functions beforehand. (See “Selecting Image Quality,” on p. 2-33.)

The world’s coral reefs, where brilliantly colored fish and a myriad of other tropical creatures come together. Aptly nicknamed “Tropical Forests under the sea”, these spots of breathtaking beauty serve as home to countless varieties of life, and to us of the land, this alluring, dream-like world forms a tropical paradise filled with romance.

The world’s coral reefs, where brilliantly colored fish and a myriad of other tropical creatures come together.

Press to select the Special Features mode. (See Chapter 3 “Useful Copy Functions”.)

Press to check the printing status, change the printing sequence or cancel printing. (See “Checking and Changing Printing Status,” on p. 5-13.)

34 What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do


Special Features Screen

When you press the [Special Features] key in the Basic Features screen, the Special Features screen appears in the touch panel display. The Special Features screen displays special functions available for copying. In some functions, when a function is selected, a more detailed screen for the selected mode appears. To close the Special Features screen and return to the Basic Features screen, press the [Done] key. Pressing the key after selecting a function brings up a help screen with guidance information.?

Guide

Special Features Screen 1/2

Press to select or cancel the Two-page Sepa-ration mode. This mode enables you to copy two pages of an opened book onto separate copy sheets. (See “Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Copy Sheets (Two-page Separation),” on p. 3-2.)

11

Press to add covers. Also press to add inser-tion sheets or chapter pages between speci-fied pages. (See “Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages to Copy Sets (Cover/Sheet Insertion),” on p. 3-4.)•When you select the [Front Cover] key.

R E P O R T R E P O R T

35What the imageRUNNER 5000 Series Can Do


Press when making copies of several originals to form a booklet. (See “Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet),” on p. 3-9.)

6

5 4

3

4

3

2

1

3

8

7

6

5

8

7 2

1

6

8 1

Press to select or cancel the Transparency Interleaving mode. This mode enables you to insert a sheet between each transparency when copying transparencies. (See “Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved be-tween Transparencies (Transparency Interleaving),” on p. 3-13.)

R E P O R TR E P O R T

R E P O R T

Interleaf sheet

Transparency

Press to select or cancel the Shift mode. This mode enables you to shift the position of the original image on the copy sheet. (See “Making Copies with Original Image Shifted (Shift),” on p. 3-16.)•When you select the [Center Shift Corner Shift] key.

Press to select or cancel the Margin mode. This mode enables you to create margins along the sides of copies. (See “Making Copies with Margins (Margin),” on p. 3-21.)



Press to select or cancel the Frame Erase mode. This mode enables you to eliminate dark border areas and lines that appear around original images, or shadows from punched holes. (See “Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase),” on p. 3-24.)•When you select the [Original Frame Erase] key.

Frame Eraseselected

Frame Erasenot selected

Press to select or cancel the Image Combina-tion mode. This mode enables you to automat-ically reduce two, four or eight originals to fit on a one-sided or two-sided copy sheet. (See “Re-ducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet (Image Combination),” on p. 3-33.)•When you select the [2 On 1] key.

2

1

1 2

Press to select or cancel the Image Separation mode. This mode enables you to divide an original into 2 or 4 sections and enlarge each section onto a copy sheet of specified size. (See “Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section on a Separate Copy Sheet (Image Separation),” on p. 3-38.)•When you select the [1 to 2] key.

2

11 2

Press to make copies feeding different-size originals together in one group in the feeder. (See “Feeding Different-size Originals Togeth-er in the Feeder (Different Size Originals),” on p. 3-43.)

CITYCITY

CITY

Original feedingdirection

LTR original

11"x17" original



Press to recall a previously set copy job. (See “Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall),” on p. 3-58.)

Press to divide the originals into several parts and scan them, then subsequently print them all together. This is convenient when you can-not load all of the originals that you want to copy at one time. (See “Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build),” on p. 3-45.)

Press to store or recall copy jobs. (See “Stor-ing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory),” on p. 3-48.)



Special Features Screen 2/2

Press to make copies with the entire black/white image inverted. (See “Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi),” on p. 3-60.)

SCENESCENE

Press to copy an original with the image re-peated in the vertical or horizontal direction. (See “Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeat),” on p. 3-62.)

CITY

CITY

CITY

Press to copy the image of the original re-versed as reflection of the mirror. (See “Mak-ing Copies with Image Reversed (Mirror Image),” on p. 3-65.)

Press to select or cancel the Sharpness mode. This mode enables you to make copies of orig-inal images with the contrast reproduced more sharply. (See “Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness),” on p. 3-67.)



You can Store Data and Print it at Your Convenience

IMPORTANT• Each box can store up to 100 items of document or image data.• You can store a total of up to 1,000 items of document or image data, or up to 3,700 pages (LTR-size

Canon Standard Chart) of document or image data, in all boxes. Depending on the conditions under which the hard disk is used, it may not be possible to attain the above values in some cases.

NOTE• For details on how to use the Mail Box, see Chapter 4 “Using the Mail Box Functions”.

When you press the key, the Box selection screen appears. The Mail Box function enables you to store data scanned using this machine, or data sent from a personal computer as if storing documents in binders. The documents (data) stored in a box can be printed whenever necessary. Also, when you set the Merge Doc-uments mode, you can print documents stored separately together as one document.

MAIL BOX

By storing a password, you can print data without other people observing it.

100 boxes

You can print data whenever desired, with the settings necessary.

Scanningvariousoriginals

Sendingdata fromcomputers

1

1

Printing merged documents



Box Selection Screen

Document Selection Screen

Printing Screen Scanning Screen

Select a box

Select a document and

You can store a name of a box or a password in the Mail Box Settings of the Additional Func-tions. (See “Setting Specifica-tions of the Mail Box Function (Mail Box Settings),” on p. 6-46.)

Originals scanned in the same way as a Copy function, or doc-uments sent from a personal computer are stored in a box.

Prints documents stored in a box. When you press the [Change P Settings] key, you can change the print settings. (See “Printing Doc-uments Stored in the Box,” on p. 4-6.)

You can set various settings when scanning originals. (See “Storing Originals in the Box,” on p. 4-3.)

keyStart



You can Check, Change, and Cancel the Print JobsSystem Monitor Screen

Ç¢

NOTE• For a description of functions, see Chapter 5 “Printing Efficiently”.• The status of each icon displayed in the screen is as follows:

: Copy job : Error : Printer job : Paper jam : Box job : Add toner

By using the System Monitor screen, you can check the status of a printing document, cancel printing, or spec-ify the printing priority.

When you press the [Secured Print] key, you can print the document sent from a computer with a password. To print the document with a password, you need to enter that password. As these documents will not be printed unless the password is entered, you can print classified documents preventing other people from ob-serving them. (See “Printing Secured Docu-ments,” on p. 5-20.)

When you press the [Print Next] key, you can change the printing order of the selected docu-ment to be printed after the current print job is completed. (See “Priority Printing,” on p. 5-16.)



Setting the Specifications According to the Method of UseAdditional Functions Screen

NOTE• Settings made in the Additional Functions screen will not be changed even when you press the key.• For details on how to set custom settings, see Chapter 6 “Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit

Your Needs”.• When the Network Multi-PDL Printer Kit is not attached, [Printer Settings], [Network Settings], [Remote

UI] and [Clear Message Board] keys are not displayed.• When the Network Multi-PDL Network Kit is not attached, [Report Settings], [Network Settings], [Remote

UI] and [Clear Message Board] keys are not displayed.• When the Network Scan function is not enabled, the [Auto Offline] key is not displayed.• For details of the following settings, refer to the instruction manual for the relevant function.

- [Printer Settings] (See the PS/PCL Reference Guide.)- [Remote UI On/Off] (See the Remote UI Guide.)- [Network Settings] (See the Network Guide.)

When you press the key, the Additional Functions screen appears in the touch panel display. With Ad-ditional Functions, you can set the specifications common to all functions. By pressing the [Copy Settings] key, you can change the default settings of copy functions. For example, you can set Auto Orientation to On or Off, or set the Auto Collate to On or Off.

Additional Functions

Reset



Displaying a Guide ScreenGuide Function Screen

Usage Guide

Pressing the key after selecting a function brings up a guide screen with an explanation for that function. Use this guide function if you do not understand how to use the mode you are setting.

(In this example, the Margin mode has been selected.)If you press the key while setting [Margin], the touch pan-el display changes to the Guide Function Screen shown on the right. To return to the display for [Margin], press the [Done] key.

Information Guide

This machine supports many functions.To find the right function for your particular needs or to find a simple description of a function, press the key while the Basic Features screen or Special Features screen is dis-played. The Information Guide screen appears in the touch panel display as shown on the right.

Example: When copying photo originals:Press the [Various originals] key.You can display simple explanations of the various types of originals using the [▼] or [▲] key. Press the [Done] key to return to the Various originals menu screen. To return the display to the Guide Menu, press the [Guide Menu] key.

Pressing the key brings up a guide screen with information about the various features that are available with your machine.

?Guide

?Guide

?Guide

?Guide



You can Read the Messages From the System Manager

NOTE• The message board can be used when the network printer function is attached.

The following three types of message board are available:

A message board without the [Done] key.

A message board with the [Done] key.

NOTE• If you press the [Done] key and close the message

board, you can perform normal operation. The mes-sage appears again when the main power is turned back ON, or after Auto Clear has taken place. You can set the Auto Clear Time from 0 to 9 minutes, in one-minute increments. You can also cancel this function. (See “Setting the Time Taken for Display to Return to Basic Screen after Finishing Operations,” on p. 6-27.)

A message board which the message appears in the Job/ Print monitor area.

NOTE• For details on how to erase the message board, see

“Erasing a Message Board,” on p. 6-73.

A message board is used to display messages for the users of this machine. The messages are sent from the system manager using the utility software.



Functions that Conserve Power Consumption
You can conserve power consumption efficiently using the following functions when the machine is not operated.
NOTE• There will be a slight delay when starting to use the machine next time.• The touch panel display will turn OFF when the machine enters one of these functions.• You can print data sent from a computer even when the machine enters one of these functions.

Energy Saver Mode

NOTE• The following Energy Saver Mode settings can be selected: –10% mode, –25% mode, –50% mode, and

None mode. (See “Changing the Energy Saver Mode Setting,” on p. 6-14.)

Low-Power Mode

NOTE• The Low-Power Mode Time can be set from 10 minutes to 4 hours. (See “Setting the Low-Power

Mode Time,” on p. 6-30.)

Sleep Mode

NOTE• Turn the control panel power switch OFF when not using your machine for a prolonged period of time, for

example at night.• The Auto Sleep Time can be set from 10 minutes to 4 hours. (See “Setting the Time to Initiate Auto Sleep

after Finishing Operations,” on p. 6-26.)

When the machine will not be used for a long time, you can press the key to put the machine in Energy Saver mode. This reduces the temperature of machine’s fixing unit and thereby conserves energy. To start op-erations again, press the key once more. Pressing the control panel power switch also reactivates the machine.

Energy Saver

Energy Saver

If the machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a period of about 15 minutes after prints have been made or a key operation performed, the machine automatically enters the Low-Power mode. The Low-Power mode reduces energy consumption by lowering the fixation temperature. This function meets the ENERGY STAR® Program for energy efficiency. To start operations again, press the key once more. Pressing the control panel power switch also reactivates the machine.

Energy Saver

The Sleep mode reduces more power consumption than the Energy Saver mode and the Low-Power mode. You can set the machine to enter the Sleep mode whenever you desire by pressing the control panel power switch. However there will be a slight delay when starting to use the machine next time. To reactivate the ma-chine, press the control panel power switch. The Basic Features screen will appear on the touch panel display.

Functions that Conserve Power Consumption46


Quiet Mode

NOTE• The Quiet Mode settings are in the range from 0 to 9 minutes in one-minute increments. (See “Setting the

Time Taken for the Unit to Quiet Down after Last Task,” on p. 6-28.)

Daily Timer

NOTE• The Daily Timer settings are in the range from Sunday to Saturday and from 00:00 to 23:59. (See “Setting

the Time That the Unit’s Power Turns OFF on Different Days of the Week,” on p. 6-29.)

Precedence relation of each function

- You can set the machine to enter the Energy Saver mode when the machine is neither in the Low-Power mode nor the Sleep mode.

- If the machine is not operated for a period of about 15 minutes while the machine is in the Energy Saver mode, the machine automatically enters the Low-Power mode.

- If the machine is not operated for a period of about 1 hour when the machine is in the Low-Power mode, or at the time and day of the week set with the Daily Timer, the machine automatically enters the Sleep mode.

- If the time set for the Auto Sleep mode to take place is shorter than that of the Low-Power mode, the Auto Sleep mode has priority. (The machine enters the Sleep mode.)

- Even when the machine is in the Low-Power mode, the Daily Timer will be performed at the time and day of the week set with the Daily Timer. (The machine enters the Sleep mode.)

- Even before the time set with the Auto Sleep mode, the Daily Timer will be performed at the time and day of the week set with the Daily Timer. (The machine enters the Sleep mode.)

In the case of default settings :(Low-Power mode : 15 minutes, Auto Sleep mode : 1 hour, Daily Timer : no setting)

If this machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a certain period of time after prints have been made or the key operation performed, the device sounds from this machine are stopped, and the machine enters the Quiet mode.

At the time and day of the week set with the daily timer, the control panel power switch automatically turns OFF. To reactivate the machine, press the control panel power switch.

Energy Saver mode

Low-Power mode

Auto Sleep mode

Operation done 15 minutes 1 hour Time

You can set the Energy Saver mode whenever desired by pressing the key during this period.

Energy Saver

Low-Power mode

Sleep mode

47Functions that Conserve Power Consumption


Other Useful Functions
Auto Drawer Switching Function
NOTE• You can set whether or not a paper drawer is subject to Auto Drawer Switching for each function. (See

“Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/ Auto Drawer Switching,” on p. 6-10.)

Auto Clear Function

NOTE• You can set the Auto Clear Time from 0 to 9 minutes, in one-minute increments. (See “Setting the Time

Taken for Display to Return to Basic Screen after Finishing Operations,” on p. 6-27.)

Copy Waiting Time Display Function

NOTE• The job duration time is not displayed for the Transparency Interleaving, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Different

Size Originals, Rotate Collating and Rotate Grouping modes, or when the copy waiting time is less than one minute. (See “Setting the Job Duration Display,” on p. 6-39.)

If a paper drawer runs out of paper during printing, the machine automatically locates another paper drawer loaded with the same size paper, and begins feeding paper from that paper drawer.

If the machine is not operated for a period of about 2 minutes after prints have been made or a key operation performed, it automatically returns the Settings to the Standard mode.

When you turn On the Job Duration Display in the Additional Functions, the display shows the copy waiting time depending on the selected copy mode.

Other Useful Functions48


Paper Supply Indicator Function

Paper Output

This function shows the remaining amount of paper in each paper drawer when selecting the paper source (see “Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select),” on p. 2-9, “Selecting the Print Paper Size (Paper Se-lect),” on p. 4-61) or when paper in one paper drawer has run out during printing. There are four different indicators as shown below.

Display when selecting paper

Display Remaining paperPaper drawer is approximately 50% - 100% full.Paper drawer is approximately 10% - 50% full.Paper drawer is less than approximately 10% full.Paper drawer is empty.

Display when paper has run out

Paper Supply indicator

When scanning and printing one original, and when printing on free-size paper or other available paper set in the stack bypass, the papers are output face up. In other cases, papers are output face down in page order. For details of other available papers, see “Available Paper Stock,” on p. 1-17.

49Other Useful Functions


Bef

ore

You

Sta

rt U

sing

Thi

s M

achi

ne1


Before You Start Using This Machine

This chapter describes what you should know before using this machine.

Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2External View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Internal View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Control Panel Parts and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Main Power and Control Panel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Control Panel Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Using the Touch Panel Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Frequently-used Keys on the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Touch Panel Key Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Adjusting the Brightness of the Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Placing Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Orientation of Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Placing an Original on the Platen Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Placing Originals in the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Available Paper Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

1C H A P T E R

1-1

1B

efor

e Yo

u S

tart

Usi

ng T

his

Mac

hine


Parts and Their Functions
External View
Control panelOriginal supply trayFeederOriginal output areaStack bypassMain power switchRight coverPaper drawer 3, 4Paper drawer 1, 2

Original supply tray

Feeder

Original output area

Control panel

Paper drawer 1, 2Each paper drawer holds up to 1,500 sheets of paper (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)).

Paper drawer 3, 4Each paper drawer holds up to 550 sheets of paper (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)). You can adjust the paper drawer 3 to hold the following standard paper sizes: 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR.

Stack bypassFeeds transparencies and non-standard size paper stock. (See “Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass,” on p. 2-12.)

Main power switchPress to the “I” side to turn the power ON. (See “Main Power and Control Panel Power,” on p. 1-6.)

Right coverOpen this cover when clearing a paper jam. (See “Removing Paper Jams,” on p. 8-2.)

(See “Control Panel Parts and Functions,” on p. 1-4.)

1-2 Parts and Their Functions

Bef

ore

You

Sta

rt U

sing

Thi

s M

achi

ne1


Internal View

Rear side of platen glass coverPlaten glassToner supply coverFront coverFixing Transport unitDuplexing Transport unitBreaker

Platen glass

Rear side of platen glass cover

Front cover

Duplexing Transport unit (Unit 2)

Fixing Transport unit (Unit 1)

Toner supply cover

Breaker(See “Periodic Inspection of the Breaker,” on p. 26.)

Test button

Parts and Their Functions 1-3

Bef

ore

You

Sta

rt U

sing

Thi

s M

achi

ne1


Feeder

IMPORTANT• If the paper delivery slot is blocked, printing may not be correctly performed. Therefore, do not place

objects in the original output area.

Control Panel Parts and Functions

Feeder coverOriginal supply traySlide guideOriginal output area

Feeder cover Original supply tray

Original output areaSlide guide

Original set indicatorLights when originals areplaced on the originalsupply tray.

?

ON / OFF

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0ID

9

C

Start

StopReset

Guide


Interrupt

COPY MAIL BOX SCAN

Processing/Data Error Power

CounterCheck Display Contrast Energy Saver

Clear

Touch panel display

2: Display contrast dial

1: Counter Check key

3: COPY key

4: MAIL BOX key

5: SCAN key

6: Numeric keys

7: Energy Saver key

8: Control panel power switch (sub power supply)

9: Stop key

10: Start key

11: Clip holder

12: Reset key13: Guide key

14: Additional Functions key15: Interrupt key

16: ID key17: Processing/Data indicator

18: Error indicator19: Clear key 20: Main Power indicator

Parts and Their Functions1-4

Bef

ore

You

Sta

rt U

sing

Thi

s M

achi

ne1


Counter Check keyDisplay contrast dialCOPY keyMAIL BOX keySCAN keyNumeric keys

The value of the charging counter is displayed in the touch panel.

Use to adjust the brightness of the touch panel display.

Press to use the Copy function. The Copy Basic Features screen appears in the touch panel display.

Press to use the Mail Box function. The Box selection screen appears in the touch panel.

Press when the function is extended.

Press to enter numerical values.

Press to place the machine in the Energy Saver mode.

Press to turn the control panel ON or OFF. When set to OFF, the machine is in the Sleep mode.

Press to temporarily stop a scanning operation or an output operation of the copy function.

Press to start an operation.

Place paper clips here.

Press to return the settings to the Standard mode.

Press to display explanations of modes or functions in the touch panel display.

Press to set additional functions.

Press to interrupt a continuous copy job when you need to make priority copies.

Press when setting the Department ID Management function.

Flashes when this machine is performing operations.

Flashes or lights when there is trouble in this machine. When the indicator flashes, follow the message which appears in the display. When it lights, contact your service repesentative.

Press to clear incorrectly entered values or characters.

Lights when the main power is turned ON.

1: Counter Check key

2: Display contrast dial

3: COPY key

4: MAIL BOX key

5: SCAN key

6: Numeric keys

7: Energy Saver key

8: Control panel power switch (sub power supply)

9: Stop key

10: Start key

11: Clip holder

12: Reset key

13: Guide key

14: Additional Functions key

15: Interrupt key

16: ID key

17: Processing/Data indicator

18: Error indicator

19: Clear key

20: Main Power indicator

Parts and Their Functions 1-5

1B

efor

e Yo

u S

tart

Usi

ng T

his

Mac

hine


Main Power and Control Panel Power
The machine is provided with two power switches, a main power switch and a control panel power switch.
Turning the Power ON

1 Make sure that the power plug is firmly inserted into the power outlet, and press the power switch to ON (“ I ” side).

The main power switch is located on the right side of the machine. The main power indicator on the control panel lights when the main power switch is turned ON.

WARNING• Never remove or insert the power plug with wet

hands. This can cause electrical shock.

IMPORTANT• If you turn OFF the main power, wait at least three

seconds before turning the main power back ON.• If the main power indicator on the control panel

does not light even though the main power switch is ON, be sure to check the breaker to see if it is OFF. (See “When the Power does not Turn ON,” on p. 8-36.)

NOTE• When turning OFF the main power, press the main

power switch to the “ ” side.

The screen on the right is displayed until the machine becomes ready to scan.

1-6 Main Power and Control Panel Power

Bef

ore

You

Sta

rt U

sing

Thi

s M

achi

ne1


The screen on the right is displayed when the machine becomes ready to scan.

NOTE• In this status, jobs can be reserved. (See

“Reserving a Job while the Machine is Warming Up,” on p. 5-5.)

2 The machine becomes ready to print after about 5 minutes. (at a room temperature of 68°F).

Standard mode is set in the touch panel.

IMPORTANT• If you scan originals while the machine is warming

up, it will take longer than the time mentioned above for the machine to become ready to print.

NOTE• The standard copy settings are as follows:

- Copy ratio: Direct (100%)- Paper selection: Auto Paper Selection- Copy exposure: Auto Exposure Control- Copy quantity: 1- Copy function: 1→1-sided copy

• You can change the standard copy settings. (See “Changing the Current Standard Settings,” on p. 6-42.)

• You can choose which functions to display in the Basic Features screen according to the Additional Functions settings. (See “Selecting the Initial Func-tion at Power ON,” on p. 6-6.)

If the message “You must insert a control card.” appears, insert a control card. (See “Operations before Using Copy or Mail Box Functions,” on p. 10-3.)

Main Power and Control Panel Power 1-7

Bef

ore

You

Sta

rt U

sing

Thi

s M

achi

ne1


If the message “Enter the Department ID and Password using the numeric keys.” appears, enter the Department ID and Password. (See “Operations after Turning the Power ON,” on p. 10-4.)

Control Panel Power SwitchPress the control panel power switch to cancel the Sleep mode and resume normal machine operations.

NOTE• The machine can receive documents from a per-

sonal computer, and print them out even in the Sleep mode.

Main Power and Control Panel Power1-8

Cancel KeyNext KeyBack KeyDone KeyOK keySpecial FeatureKey


Using the Touch Panel Display

Bef

ore

You

Sta

rt U

sing

Thi

s M

achi

ne1

Frequently-used Keys on the Touch Panel DisplayThe following keys on the touch panel display are used frequently.

key Press to close the current setting screen, retaining the programmed settings in the Additional Functions screen.Press to cancel the function (mode) that is either being set or has already been set in screens other than the Additional Functions screen.

key Press to set the function (mode) and proceed to the next setting procedure.

key Press to go back to the previous procedure, saving the setting already set, when setting a function (mode).

key Press to close the present screen.

key Press to decide the setting of a function (mode).

key The [ ] mark in some keys indicates that those keys have another screen to set their functions.

s

Using the Touch Panel Display 1-9

Bef

ore

You

Sta

rt U

sing

Thi

s M

achi

ne1


Touch Panel Key DisplayWhen you press a key displayed on the screen, the key is highlighted and the corresponding function (mode) is set. Some keys may not be highlighted even when that function (mode) is set.

CAUTION• Press the touch panel keys gently with a finger. Do not press the touch panel with a pencil, ball-

point pen, or other sharp objects. Such sharp objects can scratch the surface of the touch panel or break it.

NOTE• Before using the touch panel, peel off the protective film from the display.

When you set a certain function (mode), the characters on some keys may become difficult to see. You cannot press these keys displayed in this way, which means that you cannot set these functions in combination with the presently set function (mode).

Adjusting the Brightness of the Touch PanelIf the touch panel display is hard to view, use the display contrast dial on the control panel to adjust the brightness.

To make the touch panel brighter, turn the dial counter-clockwise. To make it darker, turn the dial clockwise.

Presently set function

Functions that cannot be set in combination with the presently set function

Functions that can be set in combination with the presently set function

Using the Touch Panel Display1-10


Placing Originals

Bef

ore

You

Sta

rt U

sing

Thi

s M

achi

ne1

Set the originals in one of the following places, depending on the size and type that you want to print and the settings that you have programed.

● Platen glassPlace the originals on the platen glass when scanning bound originals, originals on heavy paper, lightweight paper, and transparencies.

● FeederPlace a stack of originals in the feeder, then press the key, and the machine automatically scans them into memory. Two-sided originals can also be automatically turned over and scanned as two-sided image data.

NOTE• If the original has too many pages to be placed in the feeder all at once, set the Job Build mode. (See

“Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build),” on p. 3-45, and “Scanning Originals Separately Set as One Document (Job Build),” on p. 4-45.)

Start

Placing Originals 1-11

Bef

ore

You

Sta

rt U

sing

Thi

s M

achi

ne1


Orientation of OriginalsYou can place originals vertically or horizontally. Always align the top edge of your original with the back edge of the platen glass or the feeder.

NOTE• If the top edge of the original is not aligned with the back edge of the platen glass, prints may not be made

correctly depending on the mode you have set.• LTR/ STMT-size originals can be placed vertically or horizontally. However, the scanning speed for hori-

zontally placed originals is somewhat slower than that for vertically placed originals. You can place origi-nals horizontally when printing with Preset Zoom mode, such as LTR→11"x17". (Horizontally placed LTR/STMT-size originals are referred to as “LTRR/ STMTR”.)

• 11"x17"/ LGL-size originals must be placed horizontally.

Place the original face down.

Place the original face down.

[Platen glass]

Vertical placement Horizontal placement

ABC ABC

[Feeder]

Vertical placement Horizontal placement

Placing Originals1-12

Bef

ore

You

Sta

rt U

sing

Thi

s M

achi

ne1


Placing an Original on the Platen GlassYou should use the platen glass when scanning books, originals on heavy or lightweight paper, transparencies etc., into memory.

1 Lift up the feeder.

IMPORTANT• Lift up the feeder about 11-7/8" (30 cm), so that the

S-shaped sensor detaches from the feeder. Other-wise, the size of originals may not be detected cor-rectly.

• Return the original supply tray to its original posi-tion if the original supply tray is pulled up.

2 Place your original.

The surface that you want to scan into memory must be placed face down. Align the corner of the original with the top left corner of the platen glass.

NOTE• Place books and other bound originals on the

platen glass in the same way.• When enlarging LTR/ STMT-size originals to

11"x17"/ LGL-size paper, place the original hori-zontally on the platen glass and align it with the LTRR or STMTR marks.

• When copying STMT-size original using the platen glass, you need to set the “LTRR/STMT Original Selection” in the Additional Functions. (See “Distin-guishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals,” on p. 6-16.)


Bef

ore

You

Sta

rt U

sing

Thi

s M

achi

ne1


3 Gently lower the feeder.

CAUTION• Close the feeder gently to avoid catching your

hand, as this may result in personal injury.• Do not press down the feeder hard when using

the platen glass to scan thick books. This may damage the platen glass and cause personal injury.

NOTE• When placing originals on the platen glass, the size

of the original is detected after the feeder has been lowered. Be sure to lower the feeder before copy-ing.

• Postcards cannot be detected. Follow the instruc-tions on the display which appears after pressing the key and specify the original size, or select the paper manually.

• Remove the original from the platen glass when scanning is completed.

Start


Bef

ore

You

Sta

rt U

sing

Thi

s M

achi

ne1


Placing Originals in the FeederPlace a stack of originals in the feeder, then press the key, and the machine automatically scans them into memory. Two-sided originals can also be automatically scanned as two-sided image data.You can place the following originals in the original supply tray:• Weight : 13 to 32-lb bond (50 to 128 g/m2)• Size : 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMT• Tray capacity : 100 sheets (20-lb bond (80 g/m2))

IMPORTANT• Do not place the following types of originals in the feeder:

- Originals with tears or large binding holes- Severely curled originals or originals with sharp folds- Clipped or stapled originals - Carbon-backed paper or other originals which might not feed smoothly - Transparencies and other highly transparent originals

• Check the condition of originals which have been fed through the feeder 30 times. Originals which have been fed through the feeder 30 times can become folded or wrinkled and might not be fed smoothly.

• If the feeder rollers are soiled from scanning an original written with pencil, perform the Feeder Cleaning. (See “Original Scanned Using the Feeder Becomes Dirty (Feeder Cleaning),” on p. 8-30.)

NOTE• Place the original as far as it will go until the original set indicator is lit.

1 Adjust the slide guides to fit the size of the originals.

Start


Bef

ore

You

Sta

rt U

sing

Thi

s M

achi

ne1


2 Neatly place your originals face up in the origi-nal supply tray.

IMPORTANT• Do not add or remove originals while the originals

are being scanned.

NOTE• When enlarging LTR/ STMT-size originals to

11"x17"/ LGL-size paper, place your originals hori-zontally.

• You can place different-size originals (i.e. LTR and 11"x17", STMT and LTRR) together in one group in the feeder when you set the Different Size Orig-inals mode. (See “Feeding Different-size Origi-nals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals),” on p. 3-43.)

• The scanned originals are output face down to the original output area.

When scanning is completed, remove the original sequentially from the original output area to avoid paper jams.

Original output area



Available Paper Stock

Bef

ore

You

Sta

rt U

sing

Thi

s M

achi

ne1

Paper types available for this machine are as follows:When you store the paper type loaded in the paper drawers of this machine, the type of paper which can be set is indicated by the icons. (See “Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer,” on p. 6-12.)

IMPORTANT

*1 Plain, Recycled, Color, Bond, and 3-Hole Punch papers are from 17-lb to 24-lb bond (64 g/m2 to

90 g/m2).

*2 Heavy paper is from 25-lb bond to 110-lb index (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2). *3 Pre-printed papers with logos or patterns.*4 When copying on Letterhead or 3-Hole Punch papers, we recommend that you set the Image Orienta-

tion Priority to “On” in the Additional Functions. (See “Setting Image Orientation Priority to On/ Off,” on p. 6-38.)

*5 The 3-Hole Punch papers can only be set vertically (LTR). Set the papers with the holes on the left side when loading in the paper drawers. When loading in the stack bypass or the paper deck, set the papers with the holes on the right side.

Plain *1

Heavy *2

Recycled *1

Color *1

Letterhead *3 *4

Tracing Paper

Transparency

Labels

3-Hole Punch*1 *4 *5

Bond *1

Paper drawer 1, 2Paper Type Paper drawer 3, 4 Stack bypass Paper Deck

Available Loading Place (Paper Set Place)

Available Paper Stock 1-17

Bef

ore

You

Sta

rt U

sing

Thi

s M

achi

ne1


NOTE• For details on how to load paper, see the following pages:

- Paper drawer 1 to 4: Loading Paper (See p. 7-2.)- Paper Deck: Loading Paper in the Paper Deck (See p. 9-4.)- Stack bypass: Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass (See p. 2-12.)

11"x17"

LGL

LTR

LTRR

STMTR

Free Size

11" x 17"

8-1/2" x 14"

11" x 8-1/2"

8-1/2" x 11"

5-1/2" x 8-1/2"

Paper drawer 1, 2Paper Size Length x Width Paper drawer 3, 4 Stack bypass Paper Deck

Available Loading Place (Paper Set Place)

(4" x 5-7/8" to 11-5/8" x 17")

Available Paper Stock1-18

2B

asic

Cop

ying


Basic CopyingThis chapter describes the basic copy functions.

Flow of Copy Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Canceling a Copy Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Canceling from the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Canceling with the key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Automatic Paper Selection (Auto) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Manual Paper Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Enlarging/ Reducing Originals to a Standard Size (Preset Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Specifying the Copy Ratio by % (Zoom Designation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Automatically Setting the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper Sizes (Auto) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the Original Periphery from Being Cut (Entire Image) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Calculating the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper Sizes (Zoom Program) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Enlarging/Reducing Originals with Copy Ratios Set Independently for X and Y Axes (XY Zoom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32Adjusting Copy Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32Selecting Image Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33Automatic Adjustment of Exposure and Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

Entering the Copy Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36Specifying the Required Number of Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36Changing the Copy Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38Making Two-sided Copies from One-sided Originals (1 2-Sided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38Making Two-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2 2-Sided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40Making One-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2 1-Sided) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43Making Two-sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book (Book 2-Sided) . . . . . . . . 2-45

2

Stop

C H A P T E R

2-1

2. Basic Copying

2B

asic

Cop

ying


Collating Copies (Finisher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48

Checking a Sample Set Before Copying (Sample Set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54

Checking the Copy Mode Settings (Setting Confirmation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56

Changing or Canceling a Selected Copy Mode (Setting Confirmation/Cancel) . . . . . . .2-57

2-2


Flow of Copy Operations

2B

asic

Cop

ying

This section describes the flow of basic copy operations.

NOTE• For details on the following items, see the indicated pages.

- Main Power and Control Panel Power (See p. 1-6.)- Loading Paper and Adding Toner (See Chapter 7.)- Routine Cleaning (See p. 8-25.)

1 Press the key.

NOTE• If the message “You must insert a control card.”

appears, insert a Control Card. (See “Opera-tions before Using Copy or Mail Box Functions,” on p. 10-3.)

• If the message “Enter the Department ID and Pass-word using the numeric keys.” appears, enter the Department ID and Password. (See “Operations after Turning the Power ON,” on p. 10-4.)

COPY MAIL BOX SC

y Contrast

COPY

Flow of Copy Operations 2-3

2B

asic

Cop

ying


2 Place your originals.

(See “Placing Originals,” on p. 1-11.)

NOTE• When Auto Collate is set to “On”, the Collate mode

or the Offset Collate mode is automatically set at the point when you place the originals in the feeder. (See “Setting Automatic Collate On/ Off,” on p. 6-37.)

3 Set the copy mode in the Basic Features screen.

(See Chapter 2 “Basic Copying”.)

NOTE• In the Basic Features screen, you can select the

copy paper size, set exposure, image quality, copy ratio, and two-sided mode, and select the desired collating function.

4 Set the copy mode in the Special Features screen.

You can continue setting other available modes.(See Chapter 3 “Useful Copy Functions”.)

NOTE• The Special Features screen is divided into two

screens. Press the [ ▼] or [▲]key to select the desired mode.

5 Enter the copy quantity.

(See “Entering the Copy Quantity,” on p. 2-36.)

?

Start

Clear

Reset

Guide


Interrupt

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0ID

9

C

Flow of Copy Operations2-4

2B

asic

Cop

ying


6 Press the key.

If there is a current job, the machine scans the original, then waits to print it. Printing starts when the current job is completed.

IMPORTANT• You cannot change copy settings such as the copy

quantity, copy paper size and copy ratio during copying.

NOTE• When scanning is completed, remove the original.

● When the screen on the right appears:Press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.

● When you want to copy a different original while copying:You can set the next job while copying. (See “Reserving a Copy Operation during Printing (Reserve Copy),” on p. 5-7.)

● When you want to stop copy job before it is completed, press the key. (See “Canceling a Copy Job,” on p. 2-7.)

NOTE

• After you have pressed the key, several copies may be output from the machine.

• You can stop copy job in the System Monitor screen. (See “Checking and Changing Printing Status,” on p. 5-13.)

Start

Stop

Clear

3

6

9

C

Start

Start

Start

Stop

ON / OFF

ar

Stop

Stop

Flow of Copy Operations 2-5

2B

asic

Cop

ying


● When you want to interrupt a copy job:To interrupt a copy job when you need to make priority copies, press the key. (See “Inter-rupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies (Interrupt Mode),” on p. 5-3.)

7 When the copy has been made, remove it from the tray.

NOTE• If the optional Control Card is attached, remove the

Control Card. (See “Operations after Using Copy or Mail Box Functions,” on p. 10-3.)

• If you have set Department ID Management, press the key. (See “Operations after Using Copy Functions,” on p. 10-5.)

?

Processing/Data Error

Guide


Interrupt

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0ID

9

CClea

Interrupt

?

Processing/Data

Clear

Guide


Interrupt

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0ID

9

C

Error

ID

Flow of Copy Operations2-6


Canceling a Copy Job

2B

asic

Cop

ying

NOTE• You can also cancel the copy job in the System Monitor screen. (See “Checking and Changing Print-ing Status,” on p. 5-13.)

Canceling from the Touch Panel Display

1 Press the [Cancel] key on the right screen which appears while the machine is waiting to print the document.

The machine stops copying.

NOTE• When you canceled a job during scanning, remove

the original of that job.

Canceling with the Key

1 Press the key.

NOTE• When canceling a job which is being printed, press

the [Cancel] key on the touch panel which appears during printing.

2 Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press the [Cancel] key.

The selected job is canceled.

NOTE• To continue the job, press the [Resume Copy] key.• You cannot cancel multiple jobs.• When canceling multiple jobs, select and cancel

the jobs in turn.

Stop

ON / OFF

3

6

9

C

Start

Stop

Clear

Stop

Canceling a Copy Job 2-7

2B

asic

Cop

ying


3 Press the [Resume Copy] key.

Canceling a Copy Job2-8


Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select)

2B

asic

Cop

ying

NOTE• When copying an original onto the same paper size at a 100% copy ratio, the periphery of the original may

be cut slightly on the copy. For details of the size of the non-image areas, see “Non-image areas” in the “Specifications,” on p. 11-3.

• If you set the Entire Image mode, the copied image is automatically reduced slightly based on the copy paper size and copy image size. As a result, the entire original image is reproduced on the copy paper without its periphery being cut off. (See “Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the Original Periphery from Being Cut (Entire Image),” on p. 2-22.)

Automatic Paper Selection (Auto)NOTE

• “Auto” is the Standard mode setting.

1 Place your originals and press the [Paper Select] key.

2 Select the [Auto] key, and press the [Done] key.

Auto Paper SelectionPaper Select

Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select) 2-9

2B

asic

Cop

ying


The screen on the right appears.

3 Proceed to make copies in the usual way.

IMPORTANT• In the Automatic Paper Selection mode, combined use with the Auto Copy Ratio, XY Auto Copy Ratio,

Rotate Collating, Rotate Grouping, Saddle Stitch, Booklet, Image Combination, Image Separation, and Image Repeat (Auto) modes cannot be set.

• You cannot select the Automatic Paper Selection mode when you set the Different Size Originals mode in combination with the Shift mode or the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode.

• You cannot use Automatic Paper Selection when copying the following types of originals. Copy these using Manual Paper Selection.- Non-standard size originals- Highly transparent originals such as transparencies- Originals with an extremely dark background- Originals smaller than STMT in size

Manual Paper SelectionYou can make copies after selecting the paper size and type (colored paper, recycled paper, etc.) loaded in the paper drawer.


NOTE• “Auto” is the Standard mode setting.

Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select)2-10

2B

asic

Cop

ying


2 Select the desired paper size, and press the [Done] key.

NOTE• The paper icon in the display indicates that the

paper is loaded vertically, and the icon indicates that the paper is loaded horizontally in the paper drawers. Paper sizes with the suffix “R” (such as LTRR) indicate paper placed in the paper drawer or the stack bypass horizontally.

• The paper sizes are displayed in the order in which they are loaded in the paper drawers.

• The paper sizes which are loaded in the paper drawers are shown in the display.

• The type of paper (color, recycled) loaded in the paper drawers can be indicated by the icons. (See “Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer,” on p. 6-12.)

The display returns to the Basic Features screen, and the selected paper size is displayed.


NOTE

• You can cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)Reset

Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select) 2-11

2B

asic

Cop

ying


Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass
When making copies on transparencies or non-standard size paper stock, place the paper stock in the stack bypass. The following two kinds of paper can be copied using the stack bypass.
● Standard SizeYou can place standard inch paper, and A or B series paper.

● Free SizeYou can place non-standard size (4"x5-7/8" to 11"-5/8"x17" (100 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x 432 mm)) paper.

IMPORTANT• Note the following points when using the stack bypass.

- Copy quantity: 1 to about 50 sheets (stack about 3/16" (5 mm) high)- Paper size: 4"x5-7/8" to 11"-5/8"x17" (100 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x 432 mm)- Paper weight: 17-lb bond to 110-lb index (64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2)- Curl down paper before use.

(Curling amount: less than 3/8" (10 mm.))There are some types of paper stock which may meet the above specifications but cannot be fed in the stack bypass.

• Place STMT-size paper horizontally in the stack bypass.• Do not set different size paper at the same time.• When you set free-size paper, combined use with the Auto Copy Ratio, Entire Image, Staple, Hole Punch,

1 2-Sided, 2 2-Sided, Book 2-Sided, Two-page Separation, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Shift, Booklet, Trans-parency Interleaving, Image Combination, Image Separation, and Image Repeat modes cannot be set.

NOTE• When copying the following originals, you cannot use Automatic Paper Selection. Use Manual Paper

Selection with these types of paper.- Highly transparent originals such as transparencies- Originals with an extremely dark background

1 Open the stack bypass.

NOTE• If the paper you want to specify is already in the

stack bypass, press the [Paper Select] key, then specify the desired paper.

• If the paper size loaded in the stack bypass is dif-ferent from the paper size stored in the Standard Stack Bypass Settings, press the [StackBypass Setting] key and change the setting to the loaded paper size. (See “Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack bypass,” on p. 6-19.)

• If the paper loaded in the stack bypass is not the paper which you want to specify, check whether or not there is a current job or a reserved job. (See “Checking and Changing Printing Status,” on p. 5-13.)- If there is a current/ reserved job, reserve a change

for the stack bypass. (See “Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs,” on p. 5-10.)

Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass2-12

2B

asic

Cop

ying


2 Adjust the slide guides to the size of the paper.

When feeding large-size paper, pull out the auxiliary tray.

3 Place the paper in the stack bypass.

Align the required number of sheets of paper with the slide guides. The surface that you want to copy on (opened surface) must be placed face up. Insert the paper into the machine until it stops.The screen of step 4 appears in the display.

IMPORTANT• Make sure that the height of the paper stack does

not exceed the limit mark.

Slide Guide

Auxiliary tray

Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass 2-13

2B

asic

Cop

ying


4 Select the paper size, and press the [Next] key.

IMPORTANT• Set the paper size to the same size as the paper

placed on the stack bypass.• When placing paper other than a standard size,

press the [Free Size] key.

NOTE• To select A or B series paper size, press the [A/B-

size] key.

If the screen on the right is displayed, adjust the width of the slide guides to match the paper size.

5 Select the type of paper (Plain, Heavy, etc.), and press the [OK] key.

IMPORTANT• Select the correct paper type to avoid a paper jam.

NOTE• For details of paper types, see “Available Paper

Stock,” on p. 1-17.

Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass2-14

2B

asic

Cop

ying


6 Press the [Done] key.

NOTE• When you press the [StackBypass Setting] key, you

can set the paper size again. (See “Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs,” on p. 5-10.

7 Place your originals and program the copy set-tings.

NOTE• When there is no reserved job, continue the proce-

dure from step 2.


NOTE

• You can cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)

Paper size loaded presently

Paper size selected

Reset

Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass 2-15

2B

asic

Cop

ying


Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio)

Enlarging/ Reducing Originals to a Standard Size (Preset Zoom)You can enlarge or reduce standard size originals to standard paper size.

● [Reduce] ● [Enlarge]LGL → LTR (78 %) Maximum ratio* (400%)11"x17" → LGL, 11"x15" → LTR (73 %) STMT → 11"x17" (200 %)11"x17" → LTR (64 %) LTR → 11"x17" (129 %)11"x17" → STMT (50 %) LGL → 11"x17" (121 %)Minimum ratio (25%) *Only on the platen glass

IMPORTANT• Place your originals horizontally in following cases:

- When enlarging LTR-size originals to 11"x17"/ LGL-size paper.- When enlarging STMT-size originals to11"x17"-size paper.

• When reducing 11"x17"/ LGL-size originals to LTR-size with Image Orientation Priority set to “Off”, select LTRR-size paper.

NOTE• Placing an original horizontally means setting with the longer side of the original sideways.


NOTE• “Auto” is the Standard mode setting.

2 Select the [Auto] key, and press the [Done] key.

Copy RatioPreset Zoom

Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio)2-16

2B

asic

Cop

ying


3 Press the [Copy Ratio] key.

4 To reduce, select a reduction ratio. To enlarge, select an enlargement ratio.


The display returns to the Basic Features screen, and the selected copy ratio is displayed.

Changing the Copy Ratio (Copy Ratio) 2-17

2B

asic

Cop

ying



NOTE• To return the copy ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key.• You can cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)

Specifying the Copy Ratio by % (Zoom Designation)You can reduce or enlarge images by any copy ratio, in 1% increments. The available copy ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder.

1 Place your originals and press the [Copy Ratio] key.

2 Enter the copy ratio with the [–] or [+] key or the Numeric keys ( - ) in 1% increments.

NOTE• Even if you entered the ratio with the Numeric keys

( - ), you can change the entered values with the [–] and [+] keys.

• If you make a mistake when entering values, press the key, and enter the correct value.

Reset

Zoom Designation

CITY

CITY CITYCITYCITY

CopyOriginal

0 9

0 9

CClear


2B

asic

Cop

ying



NOTE• If you enter a value outside the setting range, a

message prompting you to enter the appropriate value will appear on the screen.



NOTE• To return the copy ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key.• You can cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)Reset


2B

asic

Cop

ying


Automatically Setting the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper Sizes (Auto)The machine automatically selects the appropriate copy ratio based on the size of the originals and the selected paper. The available copy ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder.

IMPORTANT• You cannot use the Auto mode with Automatic Paper Selection.• You cannot copy highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, in the Auto mode. Use the Preset

Zoom or Zoom Designation modes.• To use the Auto mode, your originals must conform to a standard paper size.

NOTE• If an error occurs between the Auto copy ratio and the actual copy size, you can adjust this with the Zoom

Fine Adjustment function. (See “Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original Image and Print Image Occur,” on p. 6-31.)

• The paper sizes that can be used with Auto are 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMT/ STMTR. However, when copying STMT-size original using the platen glass, you need to set the “LTRR/STMT Original Selection” in the Additional Functions. (See “Distinguishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals,” on p. 6-16.)


Auto

CopyOriginal


2B

asic

Cop

ying


2 Select the paper size, and press the [Done] key.

NOTE• Select a paper size other than “Auto”. When you

select the [Auto] key, the paper loaded in the paper drawer 1 will be selected.


4 Press the [Auto] key, and press the [Done] key.


NOTE• To return the copy ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key.• To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio] and [Auto] keys in that order.• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)• If the original was placed on the platen glass, the zoom ratio appears when the feeder is lowered, pro-

vided that the original size can be detected.• If the original was placed in the feeder, the zoom ratio appears when the key is pressed.• The zoom ratio can be set within the range of 25% to 400%.

Reset

Start


2B

asic

Cop

ying


Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the Original Periphery from Being Cut (Entire Image)When copying an original onto the same size of paper at a 100% copy ratio, the periphery of the original may be cut slightly on the copy.However, if you set the Entire Image mode, the copied image is automatically reduced slightly based on the copy paper size and copy image size. As a result, the entire image is reproduced on the copy without its periphery being cut off.

IMPORTANT• In the Entire Image mode, combined use with the Booklet, Frame Erase, Image Combination, Image Sep-

aration, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set.


2 Press the [Entire Image] key, and press the [Done] key.


NOTE• To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio] and [Entire Image] keys in that order.• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)

Entire Image

Reset


2B

asic

Cop

ying


Calculating the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper Sizes (Zoom Program)You can change the copy ratio by specifying the original size and paper size in inches. The following two Zoom Program modes are available.The available copy ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder.

● Making copies with the same XY copy ratio (Zoom)Designate the same copy ratio for the vertical and horizontal directions.

● Making copies with different XY copy ratios (XY Zoom)Designate different copy ratios for the vertical and horizontal directions.

NOTE• The designated sizes are converted to the copy ratio (%) as follows:

- copy ratio (%) = (copy size ÷ original size) x 100

Zoom Program

X=4" (100 mm) X=5-7/8" (150 mm)

Original Copy

X=4" (100 mm) X=3-1/8" (80 mm)

Y=5-1/2" (140 mm)Y=4-3/4" (120 mm)

Original Copy


2B

asic

Cop

ying


Making Copies with the Same XY Copy Ratio (Zoom)


2 Press the [Other Zoom] key.

3 Press the [Zoom Program] key.

Zoom


2B

asic

Cop

ying


4 Press the [Original Size] key and enter the original size, then press the [Copy Size] key and enter the copy size. Then press the [OK] key.

NOTE• When entering values in millimeters, you can use

the Numeric keys ( - ) and the key on the control panel.

• If you make a mistake when entering values, press the [C] key on the touch panel, and enter the values again.

• If you want to enter values in millimeters, press the [mm] key.

• For details on how to enter the values in inches, see “Setting in Inches,” on p. 10-8.

• To designate the sizes of the horizontal direction (X) and the vertical direction (Y) independently, press the [XY Zoom] key.

• If the zoom ratio is less than 25%, a message tell-ing you that the ratio will be adjusted to 25% will appear. If it is more than 400%, a message telling you that the ratio will be adjusted to 400% will appear.


NOTE• Place the original on the platen glass if the zoom ratio is more than 200%.• To return the copy ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key.• To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio], [Other Zoom], [Zoom Program], and [Cancel] keys in that

order.• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)

Making Copies with Different XY Copy Ratios (XY Zoom)


0 9 CClear

Reset

XY Zoom


2B

asic

Cop

ying




4 Press the [XY Zoom] key.


2B

asic

Cop

ying


5 Press the [X] (horizontal direction) key and the [Y] (vertical direction) keys for both the origi-nal size and the copy size, and enter each value for X and Y.



• If you make a mistake when entering values, press the [C] key on the touch panel, and enter the cor-rect values.



• To set the same values for the X and Y axes, press the [Zoom] key.


6 Enter all the values, and press the [OK] key.


NOTE• Place the original on the platen glass if the zoom ratio is more than 200%.• To return the copy ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key.• To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio], [Other Zoom], [Zoom Program], and [Cancel] keys in that


0 9 CClear

Reset


2B

asic

Cop

ying


Enlarging/Reducing Originals with Copy Ratios Set Indepen-dently for X and Y Axes (XY Zoom)If you set the XY Zoom mode, you can make enlarged or reduced copies with different XY copy ratios. The following two XY Zoom modes are available.The available copy ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder.

● Manually specifying the copy ratio (XY Zoom) You can manually specify the XY copy ratios in 1% increments.

NOTE• If you set the copy ratio with the XY Zoom mode, the copy image computed from the original size, copy

ratio etc., is automatically rotated and copied to match the paper.

X=120%

Y=80%

Enlarging and reducing with different XY copy ratios

Original Copy


2B

asic

Cop

ying


● Automatically specifying the copy ratio (Auto XY Zoom) The XY copy ratio is automatically set to suit the size of the selected paper.

IMPORTANT• You cannot copy highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, in the Auto XY Zoom mode. To

make copies, specify the copy ratio.

NOTE• If you set the Auto XY Zoom mode, select the paper size by Manual Paper Selection. If you do not select

the paper size, the copy ratio is automatically set to the size of the paper set in a certain paper drawer.• If you specify a magnification of smaller than 25%, a message telling you to set it to 25% will appear. If it

is larger than 400%, a message telling you to set it to 400% will appear.• If an error occurs between the Auto XY Zoom copy ratio and the actual copy size, you can adjust this with

the Zoom Fine Adjustment function. (See “Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original Image and Print Image Occur,” on p. 6-31.)

• When you set the copy ratio in Auto XY Zoom mode, the Auto Orientation will not be performed.


Auto XY Zoom

LTR

LTRR

LTRR selected

Original Copy


2B

asic

Cop

ying




4 Press the [X] and [Y] keys and enter each value for X and Y. Then press the [OK] key.

NOTE• If you select the [Auto XY Zoom] key, select a paper

size other than the “Auto”. If you select the “Auto”, the copy ratio is automatically set to the size of the paper in a certain paper drawer.

• You can enter the value using the Numeric keys ( - ) on the control panel.

• If you make a mistake when entering values, press the [C] key on the touch panel, and enter the cor-rect values.

• Even if you entered the copy ratio with the Numeric keys ( - ), you can change the entered values with the [–] and [+] keys.

• If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter the appropriate value will appear on the screen.

0 9

0 9


2B

asic

Cop

ying



NOTE• When you select the [Auto XY Zoom] key in the fol-

lowing cases, X: Auto% and Y: Auto% are displayed as the copy ratios on the Basic Features screen.- When the original is placed in the feeder.- When the original whose size cannot be detected

is placed on the platen glass.


NOTE• Place the original on the platen glass if the zoom ratio is more than 200%.• To return the copy ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key.• To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio], [Other Zoom], [XY Zoom], and [Cancel] keys in that order.• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)Reset


2B

asic

Cop

ying


Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure)
You can adjust the exposure and image quality when scanning the original you want to copy.
NOTE• You can also change the exposure during printing. (See “Changing the Exposure During Printing,” on

p. 5-2.)

Adjusting Copy Exposure You can manually adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.

1 Place your originals and press the [Light] or [Dark] key.

NOTE• Move the indicator above the [Light] and [Dark]

keys to the left to make the exposure lighter or to the right to make the exposure darker.


NOTE


Copy ExposureDarkLight

Reset

Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure)2-32

2B

asic

Cop

ying


Selecting Image QualityYou can adjust image quality to the level best suited to the quality of text or photo originals. The following three modes are available for adjusting image quality.

● Text modeThis mode is best suited for making copies from text originals. Blue prints or penciled originals can be copied clearly.

● Text/Photo modeThis mode is best suited for making copies from originals containing both text and photos.

● Photo modeThis mode is best suited for making copies from photos printed on photographic paper, or photo originals containing half-tones (i.e. printed photos).

IMPORTANT• If you make copies of an original containing half-tones such as a printed photograph using the Photo

mode, moiré may occur. If this happens, you can soften this moiré effect by using the Sharpness mode. (See “Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness),” on p. 3-67.)

• Combinations of these three modes cannot be set. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.

NOTE• When you have selected the Text, Text/Photo or Photo mode, the exposure can be adjusted only by Man-

ual Exposure Control. Automatic Exposure Control cannot be selected.• When the “Photo Mode” of Copy Settings is “On”, you can select printed image or photo after pressing the

[ ] key. (See “Setting the Photo Mode of the Copy Function,” on p. 6-41.)• If the original is a transparency, select the Text, Text/Photo or Photo mode and adjust the exposure to the

most appropriate level.

Printed Img.

TextText/PhotoPhoto



Text mode Text/Photo mode Photo mode

Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure) 2-33

2B

asic

Cop

ying


1 Place your original and press the [ ] key.

2 Select the type of original (Text, Text/Photo, Photo).

When the “Photo Mode” of Copy Settings is set to “On”, you can select the [Printed Img.] or [Photo] key. (See “Setting the Photo Mode of the Copy Function,” on p. 6-41.)

3 Press the [Light] or [Dark] key to adjust the copy exposure.



Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure)2-34

2B

asic

Cop

ying



NOTE• To cancel the setting, press the [A] key.• You can cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)

Automatic Adjustment of Exposure and Image Quality

1 Place your originals and press the [A] key.

The exposure is automatically adjusted to the level best suited to the quality of the original.

NOTE• If the original is a transparency, you may not be

able to use Automatic Exposure Control. If so, adjust the exposure using Manual Exposure Con-trol.


NOTE


Reset

A

Reset

Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure) 2-35

2B

asic

Cop

ying


Entering the Copy Quantity
Specifying the Required Number of Copies
NOTE• Up to 999 copies can be set. The maximum number of copies can also be changed. For details, contact

your service representative.

1 Press the Numeric keys ( - ) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 999).

IMPORTANT• You cannot change the copy quantity during copy-

ing.

NOTE• The maximum copy quantity varies according to

the copy job settings.

• The copy quantity appears in the upper right side of the touch panel display.

?

Start

Clear

Reset

Guide


Interrupt

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0ID

9

C

0 9

Entering the Copy Quantity2-36

2B

asic

Cop

ying


Changing the Copy Quantity

1 Press the key to clear the entered number.

Then press the Numeric keys ( - ) to enter the copy quantity again (1 to 999).

IMPORTANT• You cannot change the copy quantity during copy-

ing.

NOTE• The copy quantity appears in the upper right side of

the touch panel display.

?

Start

Stop

Processing/Data Error Power

Clear

Guide

nal Functions

nterrupt

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0ID

9

C

CClear

0 9

Entering the Copy Quantity 2-37

2B

asic

Cop

ying


Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Mode)

IMPORTANT• In the Two-sided Mode, combined use with the Two-page Separation, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving,

Image Combination, and Image Separation modes cannot be set.• In the Book 2-Sided mode, combined use with the Cover/Sheet Insertion, Binding Erase, Different Size

Originals, and Image Repeat modes in addition to the modes mentioned above cannot be set.• Non-standard paper sizes cannot be used to make two-sided copies.

NOTE• When copying with Two-sided Mode, align the top edge of the original with the back edge of the platen

glass or the feeder.• The Two-sided Mode that you have set is displayed above the [Two-sided Mode] key in the Basic Features

screen.• Paper used to make two-sided copies must conform to the following specifications:

- Paper size : 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR- Paper weight : 17-lb bond to 110-lb index (64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2)There are some types of paper which may meet the above specifications, but cannot be used to make two-sided copies.

Making Two-sided Copies from One-sided Originals (1 2-Sided)This feature enables you to make two-sided copies from one-sided originals.

IMPORTANT• Place the original horizontally when copying originals such as LTRR/ STMTR-size originals. If these origi-

nals are placed vertically, the back side of the copy will be printed upside down.

NOTE• If there are an odd number of originals, the back of the last print is left blank. (The machine’s counter does

not count the blank page as a copy.)• When combined with Different Size Originals, two-sided copying cannot be performed. The different-sized

originals will be printed as one-sided copies on their respective sizes. When wanting to make copies on both sides of the paper with different-sized originals, make sure to select the paper size you want to print on, before printing.

12-SidedTwo-sided Mode

Original Copy

Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Mode)2-38

2B

asic

Cop

ying


1 Place your originals and press the [Two-sided Mode] key.

2 Press the [1 2-Sided] key.

● When you select the [Option] key: Select the type of two-sided orientation, and press the [Done] key.

3 Press the [OK] key.

Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Mode) 2-39

2B

asic

Cop

ying


The display returns to the Basic Features screen, and “1 2-Sided” is displayed above the [Two-sided Mode] key.


NOTE• When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the screen and

press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.• To cancel the setting, press the [Two-sided Mode] and [Cancel] keys in that order.• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)

Making Two-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2 2-Sided)This feature automatically turns over two-sided originals placed in the feeder to make two-sided copies.

Start

Reset

22-Sided

Original Copy


2B

asic

Cop

ying


1 Place your originals in the feeder and press the [Two-sided Mode] key.




● When you select the [Option] key:Select the type of two-sided orientation for origi-nal and copy paper, and press the [Done] key.


2B

asic

Cop

ying






press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.• To cancel the setting, press the [Two-sided Mode] and [Cancel] keys in that order.• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)

Start

Reset


2B

asic

Cop

ying


Making One-sided Copies from Two-sided Originals (2 1-Sided)This feature automatically turns over two-sided originals placed in the feeder to make one-sided copies.

IMPORTANT• Place the original horizontally when copying original such as LTRR/ STMTR-size original. If these origi-

nals are placed vertically, the back side of the copy will be printed upside down.

NOTE• When copying two-sided original placed on the platen glass on one side of different sheets, set the Job

Build mode. (See “Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build),” on p. 3-45.)

1 Place your originals in the feeder and press the [Two-sided Mode] key.




21-Sided

Original Copy


2B

asic

Cop

ying


● When you press the [Option] key:Select the type of original, and press the [Done] key.




NOTE• To cancel the setting, press the [Two-sided Mode] and [Cancel] keys in that order.• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)Reset


2B

asic

Cop

ying


Making Two-sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book (Book 2-Sided)This feature enables you to make two-sided copies from facing pages or front and back sides of a page in a bound original, such as a book or a magazine.

● Left/Right Two-sided

● Front/Back Two-sided

IMPORTANT• Place the originals on the platen glass. You cannot place the original in the feeder and copy it in the

Book 2-Sided mode.• When using this feature, select LTR-size paper.• When copying with Front/Back Two-sided, the front side of the first two-sided page and the back side of

the last two-sided page are left blank. The machine’s counter does not count the blank page as a copy.

Book 2-Sided

1

1 2

2

1

Original Copy

1

2

2

1

Original Copy


2B

asic

Cop

ying


1 Place your original on the platen glass and press the [Two-sided Mode] key.

NOTE• If you want to make copies in page order, begin

copying from the first page and work your way for-ward.

• Place the original face down so that its top edge is aligned with the back edge of the platen glass.

2 Press the [Book 2-Sided] key, and press the [Next] key.

3 Select the type of layout, and press the [OK] key.

NOTE• If you select the [Left/Right Two-sided] key, the fac-

ing pages are copied onto the front and back sides of a single sheet.

• If you select the [Front/Back Two-sided] key, the front and back sides of the left page, or the front and back sides of the right page are copied onto the front and back sides of a single sheet.

The display returns to the Basic Features screen and “Book 2-Sided” is displayed above the [Two-sided Mode] key.


2B

asic

Cop

ying



To scan the next two facing pages, place the original and press the key again.When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.

NOTE• To cancel the setting, press the [Two-sided Mode]

and [Cancel] keys in that order.• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the

key. (The machine returns to the standard mode.)

Start

Reset


2B

asic

Cop

ying


Collating Copies (Finisher)
The Finisher mode can be selected to collate the copies in various ways by pages or copy sets. The copied papers are output face down.
● When “Collate” is set:Copies are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order, and output onto the trays as follows.

● When “Group” is set:All copies of the same original page are automatically collated and grouped together, and output onto the trays as follows.

● When “Staple” is set:Copies are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order, output onto the trays as shown below, and then automatically stapled.When you select the [Corner] (TopLeft) key:

CollateFinisher

43

21

43

21

43

21

43

21

Three sets of copies specified

Originals Copy set 1 Copy set 2 Copy set 3

Group

33

3

22

2

43

21

11

1

44

4

OriginalsGroupedcopies of page 1

Groupedcopies of page 2




Staple

43

21

1 1 1



Collating Copies (Finisher)2-48

2B

asic

Cop

ying


When you select the [Double] (Left) key:

When you select the [Saddle Stitch] key:

IMPORTANT• [Staple] can only be specified when the machine is equipped with the Finisher (option).• You cannot set the Staple mode when copying on transparencies, tracing papers, labels, and 3-hole

punch.• [Saddle Stitch] can only be specified when the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is attached.• Paper sizes which can be saddle stitched are 11"x17"/ LTRR.• The maximum number of sheets that can be bound at a time is 15.

NOTE• Place the originals to be finished into a booklet as shown in the illustration above. (See “Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet),” on p. 3-9.)

• [Saddle Stitch] can only be set when the 1 2-Sided or 2 2-Sided mode is selected. (See “Two-sided Copying (Two-sided Mode),” on p. 2-38.)

● When “Non-collate” is set (none of the above (Collate, Group or Staple) are set):

Staple

43

21

1 1 1



6

5 4

3 3

8

7 2

1

6

8 1

36

8 1

36

8 1



Non-collate

43

4

3

2 2

11

Originals Copies

Collating Copies (Finisher) 2-49

2B

asic

Cop

ying


● When “Hole Punch” is set:Punches 2 or 3 holes in the copied sheets.

When you select 11"x17"/ LTR-size paper:

IMPORTANT• [Hole Punch] can only be specified when the Finisher is equipped with the Puncher Unit-B1.• The machine automatically selects the type of hole punch (2 or 3 holes) depending on the selected paper

size.- 2 holes: LGL/ LTRR- 3 holes: 11"x17"/ LTR

• Holes cannot be punched in transparencies, tracing papers, labels, and 3-hole punch.

● When “Rotate” is set:When originals of the same size are placed, the pages are aligned and the copy sets are deliv-ered in alternating directions.

IMPORTANT• You can only select LTR/ LTRR-size paper.• [Rotate] can only be specified when the machine is not equipped with the Finisher (option).

● When “Offset” is set:Copies are shifted to the front and back respectively.

IMPORTANT• [Offset] can only be specified when the machine is equipped with the Finisher (option).• You cannot select STMTR-size paper.

Hole Punch

43

21

1

Original Copy

Rotate

1

1

43

21

1

Original Copy

Rotate

1

43

21

1

1

Original Copy


2B

asic

Cop

ying


1 Place your originals in the feeder and press the [Finisher] key.

NOTE• When Auto Collate is set to “On”, the Offset Collate

mode is automatically set at the point when you place the originals in the feeder. (See “Setting Automatic Collate On/ Off,” on p. 6-37.)

2 Select the desired collate feature, and press the [OK] key.

NOTE• When you select the [Staple] key, press the [Next]

key.• The [Staple] key only appears when the Finisher

(option) is attached.• The [Rotate] key only appears when the Finisher

(option) is not attached.• The [Hole Punch] key only appears when a

Puncher Unit-B1 is attached to the Finisher.• The [Offset] key only appears when the Finisher

(option) is attached.

● When you select the [Staple] key:Select the type of stapling ([Corner], [Double], [Saddle Stitch]) and the position to be stapled, and press the [OK] key.

IMPORTANT• The maximum number of papers which can be

stapled at a time is as follows:- 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR : 30 sheets- LTR : 50 sheets

■ When you select the [Corner] key:Select the staple position, and press the [OK] key.

IMPORTANT• STMTR-size paper cannot be corner-stapled.

When the Finisher is attached.

When the Finisher is not attached.


2B

asic

Cop

ying


■ When you select the [Double] key: Select the staple position, and press the [OK] key.

IMPORTANT• LGL/ LTRR/ STMTR-size papers cannot be double-

stapled.

■ When you select the [Saddle Stitch] key:Press the [Next] key.

IMPORTANT• [Saddle Stitch] can only be specified when the

Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is attached.• LGL/ LTR/ STMTR-size papers cannot be saddle

stitched.

NOTE• You can adjust the saddle stitch position. (See

“Changing the Saddle Stitch Position,” on p. 6-33.)

Select the paper size, and press the [OK] key.

● When you select the [Rotate] key:When the Automatic Paper Selection is set, press the [Next] key. Then select the LTR or LTRR-size paper, and press the [OK] key.

NOTE• Press the [OK] key after selecting the [Rotate] key

in the following cases:- Available paper size is selected manually.- Available paper size is loaded for both horizontal

and vertical direction.- Drawer Eligibility for APS/ADS of the paper draw-

ers loaded with available paper size is set to “On”.


2B

asic

Cop

ying


● When you select the [Hole Punch] key:Punches holes (2 or 3 holes) in the printed sheets.

IMPORTANT• The machine automatically selects the type of hole

punch (2 or 3 holes) depending on the selected paper size.- 2 holes: LGL/ LTRR- 3 holes: 11"x17"/ LTR

• You cannot punch holes in STMTR-size paper.

The display returns to the Basic Features screen and the selected feature is displayed above the [Finisher] key.



press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.• To cancel the setting, press the [Finisher] and [Cancel] keys in that order.• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)

When the Offset Collate is set.

Start

Reset


2B

asic

Cop

ying


Checking a Sample Set Before Copying (Sample Set)
Before making multiple copies, the copying result can be checked using the Sample Set mode.
NOTE• The machine’s counter counts the sample print as a print.

1 Place your originals and program the copy set-tings.

NOTE• The [Sample Set] key is displayed when you set a

multiple number of copy sets in the Collate, Staple or Cover/Sheet Insertion modes. This key is not displayed when you set the Group mode.

2 Press the [Sample Set] key, then press the

key.

Sample Set copying starts and one copy set is made.

Sample Set

Start

Checking a Sample Set Before Copying (Sample Set)2-54

2B

asic

Cop

ying


3 Check the output sheet, and select the [Start Print], [Cancel] or [Change Settings] key.

NOTE• To make the remaining copies, press the [Start

Print] key.• To cancel copying, press the [Cancel] key.• To change copy settings, press the [Change Set-

tings] key.

● When you select the [Change Settings] key:Change the settings, and press the [Done] key.

NOTE• To change the number of copies, use the Numeric

keys ( - ).• To change the exposure, press the [Light] or [Dark]

key.• To make two-sided copy, press the [2-Sided Copy]

key.• To select the copy paper, press the [Paper Select]

key. (See “Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select),” on p. 2-9.)

• To collate the copied papers, press the [Finisher] key. (See “Collating Copies (Finisher),” on p. 2-48.)

• To set a margin for binding, press the [Margin] key. (See “Making Copies with Margins (Mar-gin),” on p. 3-21.)

• When you change the copy settings, the machine starts printing from the first set.

● To copy another sample set, press the [Sample Set] key.Sample set copying starts and one copy set is made.

0 9

Checking a Sample Set Before Copying (Sample Set) 2-55

2B

asic

Cop

ying


Checking the Copy Mode Settings (Setting Confirmation)
When the copy mode settings are selected on the Special Features screen etc., you can check the current settings.
1 Press the [Setting Confirmation] key on the Basic Features screen.

The display shows the selected copy mode settings.

2 Check the settings, then press the [Done] key.

The display returns to the Basic Features screen.

NOTE• When ten or more copy modes have been set, use

the [ ▼] key to bring up the next screen. To return to the previous screen, press the [▲] key.

• The [ ] mark in some keys indicates that those keys have another screen to set their functions.

Setting Confirmation

Checking the Copy Mode Settings (Setting Confirmation)2-56


Changing or Canceling a Selected Copy Mode (Setting Confirmation/Cancel)

2B

asic

Cop

ying

From the Setting Confirmation screen, you can also change or cancel selected functions.

1 Press the [Setting Confirmation] key on the Basic Features screen.

The display shows the selected copy mode settings.

2 Press the key for the copy mode you want to change or cancel.

The copy mode settings screen appears.

NOTE• When ten or more copy modes have been set, use

the [ ▼] key to bring up the next screen. To return to the previous screen, press the [▲] key.

• The [ ] mark in some keys indicates that those keys have another screen to set their functions.

• Keys which do not have the [ ] mark on the bot-tom right can be canceled by pressing the keys again.

● To change a mode (example: Sharpness) Perform the same steps as when setting the mode. Change the setting as you desire, then press the [OK] key.The display returns to the Setting Confirmation screen.

Changing or Canceling a Selected Copy Mode (Setting Confirmation/Cancel) 2-57

2B

asic

Cop

ying


● To cancel a mode Press the [Cancel] key. The display returns to the Setting Confirmation screen.



Changing or Canceling a Selected Copy Mode (Setting Confirmation/Cancel)2-58

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3


Useful Copy Functions

This chapter describes more advanced copy functions.

Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Copy Sheets (Two-page Separation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages to Copy Sets (Cover/Sheet Insertion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between Transparencies (Transparency Interleaving) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Making Copies with Original Image Shifted (Shift). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Making Copies with Original Image Shifted to the Center or a Corner . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Making Copies with Original Image Using the Numeric Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Making Copies with Margins (Margin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Making Copies Erasing the Frame of the Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Making Copies Erasing the Book Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Making Copies Erasing Binding holes etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet (Image Combination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section on a Separate Copy Sheet (Image Separation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Feeding Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals) . . . . 3-43

Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

Storing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory) . . . . . . . . . . 3-48Storing Copy Settings for a Copy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48Storing a Memory Key Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51Recalling a Copy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53Erasing a Copy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58

Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60

Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62

Making Copies with Image Reversed (Mirror Image) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65

Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67

3C H A P T E R

3-1

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Copy Sheets (Two-page Separation)
This feature enables you to copy facing pages in a book or a magazine on separate sheets of paper.
IMPORTANT• In the Two-page Separation mode, combined use with the Two-sided, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Booklet,

Transparency Interleaving, Binding Erase, Different Size Originals, Image Combination, Image Separa-tion, and Image Repeat modes cannot be set.

• Place the original on the platen glass. You cannot place the original in the feeder and copy it in the Two-page Separation mode.

• When copying facing pages with the two-sided mode, copy them with the Book 2-Sided mode. (See

“Making Two-sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book (Book 2-Sided),” on p. 2-45.)

1 Place your original on the platen glass and press the [Special Features] key.

NOTE• If you want to make copies in page order, begin

copying from the first pages and work your way forward.

• Place the original face down with the original’s top edge is against the back edge of the platen glass.


Two-page Separation

11

Original Copy

Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Copy Sheets (Two-page Separation)

3-2

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3





For the next two facing pages, place the original and press the key again.When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.

NOTE• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Two-page Separation], and [Cancel] keys in that


Start

Reset

Making Copies of Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate CopySheets (Two-page Separation)

3-3

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages to Copy Sets (Cover/Sheet Insertion)
This function enables you to program the machine to automatically add front and back covers, inser-tion sheets or chapter pages using a different type of paper stock from which is used for the main text. In addition, the front and back covers and insertion sheets can also be copied.
IMPORTANT• In the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode, combined use with the Group, Offset Group, Memory Collating, Mem-

ory Grouping, Book 2-Sided, Two-page Separation, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Image Combina-tion, Image Separation, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set.

• Stapling is not possible when the total number of output papers including insertion sheets exceeds 30 sheets (for 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR size) or 50 sheets (for LTR size).

NOTE• When copying on the front and back covers/ insertion sheets, those sheets are included in the count of

the total number of copies.• Chapter pages are included in the count of the total number of copies.

● Front CoverAdds a front cover sheet to each set of copies. The cover sheet can also be copied.

● Back CoverAdds a back cover sheet to each set of copies. The back cover can also be copied.

Cover/Sheet Insertion


Originals Copy

Printed front cover selected in the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode.


Originals Copy

Printed back cover selected in the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode.


3-4

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3


● Sheet InsertionAdds insertion sheets between the pages of copy sets. It is useful when you want to divide your copy sets into different sections with a blank sheet. The insertion sheets can also be copied.

● Chapter PageAdds chapter pages between the pages of copy sets. Since the chapter page is always copied on one side, it is useful when you want to divide the copy by chapter.

1 Place your originals in the feeder and press the [Special Features] key.




Originals Copy

Printed insertion sheets selected in the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode.


Originals Copy

Printed chapter page selected in the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode.

Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages toCopy Sets (Cover/Sheet Insertion)

3-5

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


2 Press the [Cover/Sheet Insertion] key.

3 Select the Cover/Sheet Insertion feature you want to use, and press the [Next] key.

When you select only the [Chapter Page] mode, proceed to step 5. (When you select the [Sheet Insertion] or [Chapter Page] mode.)

NOTE• You cannot select the [Sheet Insertion] and [Chap-

ter Page] modes at the same time.• You can cancel a mode by pressing the mode key

again.

4 When copying onto the front cover, back cover or insertion sheet, press the [Printed] key, and press the [Next] key.

NOTE• The display will vary depending on the setting in

step 3.• The chapter page will always be copied only on

one side.


3-6

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3


5 Make the following settings depending on the mode selected.

NOTE• The display will vary depending on the mode

selected.

● When you select the [Back Cover] key:Select the side to be copied onto, and press the [Next] key.

● When you select the [Sheet Insertion (Printed)], [Chapter Page] key:Set all positions where the sheet is to be inserted into the copies, and press the [Next] key.Specify the sheet insertion positions with the Numeric keys ( - ).

NOTE• You can insert up to 20 insertion sheets (or chapter

pages).• If you want to insert 6 or more sheets, use the [ ▼]

or [▲] keys to scroll to the insertion positions.• You cannot specify the sheet insertion position to

the first page. Set the position starting from the second page.

• To cancel a specific sheet insertion page setting, press the [ ▼] or [▲] key and press the desired page, then press the key.

● When you select the Two-sided Mode:Press the [Option] key.

0 9

CClear

Adding Front and Back Covers, Insertion Sheets and Chapter Pages toCopy Sets (Cover/Sheet Insertion)

3-7

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


Select the side to be copied onto, and press the [Done] key.

6 Select the paper source for each insertion sheet, and press the [OK] key.

NOTE• Select the same paper size for the front and back

cover, insertion sheets (or chapter page.)• The display will vary depending on the mode

selected.




NOTE• When the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the display and

press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. • To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Cover/Sheet Insertion], and [Cancel] keys in that


Start

Reset


3-8


Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet)

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3

You can copy one-sided or two-sided originals in such a way that the copies can be easily made into a booklet.

IMPORTANT• In the Booklet mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Finisher, Two-sided, Two-page Separation,

Cover/Sheet Insertion, Transparency Interleaving, Margin, Frame Erase, Different Size Originals, Image Combination, Image Separation, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set.

• When you place the originals used in the vertical direction horizontally and scan them, the images of the even number pages will be printed upside down.

• Saddle stitching will not be performed when there is only one sheet. The sheet will only be folded.




Booklet

65 4

3

4

3

2

1

3

8

7

6

5

8

7 2

1

6

8 1

Originals Copy

When the Saddle Finisher-F2 is attached.

Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet) 3-9

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


2 Press the [Booklet] key.

3 Select the original size, and press the [Next] key.

NOTE• To copy two-sided originals, also press the [2-Sided

Original] key.• To select A or B series paper size, press the [A/B-

size] key.

● When you select the [2-Sided Original] key:Select the type of the original, and press the [OK] key.

Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet)3-10

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3



Press the [OK] key, and proceed to step 7 when the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached.

IMPORTANT• The paper used for the cover page must be the

same size as the other pages. • The paper used for the main text must be from

17-lb to 20-lb bond (64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2).• The paper used for the cover page must not be

heavier than 110-lb index (200 g/m2).• When you select the [Add Cover] key, you cannot

set the paper used for the main text in the stack bypass.

NOTE• To add a cover page, press the [Add Cover] key. • Place the paper face down for the cover page in the

stack bypass.• The cover page can only be copied on the front.• 11"x17"/ LTRR-size paper can be selected.

● When you select the [Add Cover] key:Select the [On] or [Off] key to set whether or not to copy on the cover, and press the [Next] key.

Select the type of paper, and press the [Next] key.

Press the [OK] key, and proceed to step 7 when the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached.

Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet) 3-11

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


5 Select whether or not to saddle stitch the booklet, and press the [OK] key.

The display returns to the Special Features screen.

IMPORTANT• The saddle stitching cannot be set when the Sad-

dle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached.• When the number of sheet exceeds 15, the sta-

pling will not be performed, and the sheets will be output to the tray.

NOTE• The available number of output load on the booklet

tray in the saddle stitching is as follows:- Number of sheets Number of load

1- 5 25 sets 6-10 15 sets11-15 10 sets

• Saddle stitching will not be performed when there is only one sheet. The sheet will only be folded.



NOTE• When you set the Booklet mode, the Shift mode is

automatically set.



press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. • To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Booklet], and [Cancel] keys in that order.• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the standard mode.)

Start

Reset

Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet)3-12


Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between Transparencies (Transparency Interleaving)

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3

Use this mode when copying onto transparencies fed from the stack bypass. The machine automat-ically interleaves a sheet of paper between each transparency. The interleaf sheets protect the cop-ied surface of the transparencies. They can also either be printed with the same images as the transparencies or left blank.

● Blank interleaf sheets selected in the Transparency Interleaving mode.

● Printed interleaf sheets selected in the Transparency Interleaving mode.

IMPORTANT• In the Transparency Interleaving mode, combined use with the Finisher, Two-sided, Two-page Separation,

Cover/Sheet Insertion, Booklet, Image Combination, Image Separation, and Image Repeat modes cannot be set.

• You cannot make more than one set of copies at a time in the Transparency Interleaving mode.• Even if your machine is equipped with the Finisher, you cannot use any of the Finisher modes with the

Transparency Interleaving mode.

NOTE• The machine’s counter does not count blank interleaf sheets as copies.

Transparency In-terleaving


Originals

Blank interleaf sheets

TransparencyCopy

R E P O R TR E P O R T

R E P O R T

Originals

Printed interleaf sheets

TransparencyCopy

Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between Transparencies(Transparency Interleaving)

3-13

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions





2 Press the [Transparency Interleaving] key.

3 Select the size of the transparencies, and press the [Next] key.

4 Select the size of interleaf sheet, and press the [Next] key.

Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between Transparencies (Transparency Interleaving)

3-14

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3


5 Select whether or not to copy the image onto the interleaf sheet, and press the [OK] key.


NOTE• When copying interleaf sheets, those sheets are

included in the count of the total number of copies.



7 Place the transparency in the stack bypass, and proceed to make copies in the usual way.

(See “Making Copies Using the Stack Bypass,” on p. 2-12.)

NOTE• When the original is placed on the platen glass, fol-

low the instructions that appear on the display and press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.

• In the Transparency Interleaving mode, the trans-parencies are fed from the stack bypass and the interleaf sheets are fed from the paper drawer.

• The copies are output with the copied side face down, with the transparency first, followed by the interleaf sheet.

• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Transparency Interleaving], and [Cancel] keys in that order.

• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)

Start

Reset

Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between Transparencies(Transparency Interleaving)

3-15

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


Making Copies with Original Image Shifted (Shift)
● Center Shift Corner Shift
Makes copies with the entire image shifted to the center or a corner.

● No Key EntryMakes copies with entire image shifted to a designated position with the Numeric keys.

NOTE• In the Shift mode, combined use with the Image Repeat and Mirror Image modes cannot be set.• The Shift mode cannot be selected when you set the Different Size Originals mode in combination with

the Automatic Paper Selection.

Shift

Copy with original image shifted to the center

Copy with original image shifted to a corner

Original

CITY CITY

4-3/4"(120mm)

3-1/8"(80mm)

Move to designated area copy

Original Copy

3-1/8"(80mm)4-3/4"(120mm)

Making Copies with Original Image Shifted (Shift)3-16

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3


Making Copies with Original Image Shifted to the Center or a Corner

1 Place your original and press the [Special Fea-tures] key.

2 Press the [Shift] key.

3 Press the [Center Shift Corner Shift] key.

Making Copies with Original Image Shifted (Shift) 3-17

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


4 Select the shift direction by using the arrow keys, and press the [OK] key.


NOTE• “Shift direction” dose not refer to the direction in

which the original is placed on the platen glass or in the feeder, but to the direction that you want the original shifted, if the original document that you want to scan is viewed as face up and situated in the center of the copy page. The center position is the default.




NOTE• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Shift], and [Cancel] keys in that order.• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)

Making Copies with Original Image Using the Numeric Keys


Reset


Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3


2 Press the [Shift] key.

3 Press the [No Key Entry] key.

4 Select the shift direction, then enter the value using the Numeric keys ( - ).

NOTE• “Shift direction” does not refer to the direction in

which the original is placed on the platen glass or in the feeder, but to the direction that you want the original shifted, if the original document that you want to scan is viewed as face up and situated in the center of the copy page. The center position is the default.


• To change an entered value, select the direction and enter the desired value again.

• If you make a mistake when entering values, press the key on the touch panel, and enter the values again.



0 9

CClear

Making Copies with Original Image Shifted (Shift) 3-19

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


● Example: To move the image to the left:Press the [ ] key on the left to enter the value, and press the [OK] key.

NOTE• Follow the same procedure when shifting to the

right ,upper and lower sides.

● Example: To move the image in a diagonal direction:Press the [ ] key on the upper or lower side to enter the value. Next, press the [ ] key on the right or left side to enter the value, and press the [OK] key.




NOTE• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Shift], and [Cancel] keys in that order.• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)Reset

E82_Chap03.US Page 20 Tuesday, May 29, 2001 4:02 PM


Making Copies with Margins (Margin)This mode enables you to make copies with the entire original image shifted by a designated width to the left, right, top or bottom to create a margin on print sheets. Use this mode to make copies

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3

ready for placement in ring binders.

IMPORTANT• In the Margin mode, combined use with the Booklet, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be

set.• When the Margin mode is set, the entire original image is shifted to the left, right, top or bottom by a

selected width, then copied. When copying an original image that extends to the edge of the sheet, part of that image will be cut off.


2 Press the [Margin] key.

Margin

OriginalLeft margin

selectedRight margin

selectedTop margin

selectedBottom margin

selected

Making Copies with Margins (Margin) 3-21

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


3 Select the type of margin, and press the [Next] key.

IMPORTANT• If you are using the Margin and Two-sided modes

together and copying an original that already has a margin, follow the instructions below:- 1 2-sided: Set the margin for the back only.- 2 2-sided: You do not need to set the margin. Pro-

ceed to make copies in the usual way.- 2 1-sided: Set the margin for the back only.

• If you are using the Margin and Two-sided modes together and copying an original that does not have a margin, follow the instructions below:- 1 2-sided: Set the margin for both the front and

back.- 2 2-sided: Set the margin for both the front and

back.- 2 1-sided: Set the margin for both the front and

back.

● When you select the [Left Margin] or [Right Mar-gin] key:Use the [–] and [+] keys to set the margin for the front and back (0" to 13/16"/ 0 to 20 mm). Then press the [OK] key.

NOTE• If you want to enter values in millimeters, press the

[mm] key. • The default setting is 3/8" (10 mm).

● When you select the [Top Margin] or [Bottom Margin] key:Use the [–] and [+] keys to set the margin (1/16" to 13/16"/ 1 to 20 mm). Then press the [OK] key.




0 9 CClear

Making Copies with Margins (Margin)3-22

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3





NOTE• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Margin], and [Cancel] keys in that order.• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)Reset

Making Copies with Margins (Margin) 3-23

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase)
This mode erases shadows and lines that appear when copying various types of originals. The fol-lowing three Frame Erase features are available.
IMPORTANT• Combination of these three modes cannot be set. If you select one of these modes, the previously set

mode is canceled.

● Original Frame Erase Erases the dark borders and frame lines that appear around the printed paper when the original is smaller than the selected paper size.Also creates a blank border around the edge of the print paper.

IMPORTANT• In the Original Frame Erase mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Booklet, Image Combination,

Image Separation, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set.

FrameErase

Original (STMT) Original Frame

Erase modeselected

Copy (LTR)

Copy (LTR)

Original Frame Erase mode not selected

Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase)3-24

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3


● Book Frame Erase Erases the dark border as well as center and contour lines that appear when copying facing pages in a bound original onto a single print paper.

IMPORTANT• In the Book Frame Erase, combined use with the Entire Image, Booklet, Image Combination, Image

Separation, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set.

● Binding Erase Erases the shadows that appear in copies from binding holes in originals.

IMPORTANT• In the Binding Frame Erase mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Book 2-Sided, Two-page Sepa-

ration, Booklet, Image Separation, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set.• Do not place originals with binding holes in the feeder, as this may damage the originals.

Original

Book Frame Erase selected

Copy

Copy

Book Frame Erase not selected

Original

Binding Erase mode selected

Copy

CopyBinding Erase mode not selected

Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase) 3-25

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


Making Copies Erasing the Frame of the Originals

1 Place your originals and press the [Special Features] key.

2 Press the [Frame Erase] key.

3 Press the [Original Frame Erase] key, and press the [Next] key.

4 Select the size of the original, and press the [Next] key.

NOTE• You can set the Original Frame Erase mode only

on original sizes shown in the touch panel display.• To select A or B series paper size, press the [A/B-

size] key.

Original FrameErase


Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3


5 Set the desired original frame erase width using the [–] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key.

The value set here is specified uniformly around the original.To set frame erase width values for the top, bottom, left and right sides of the original independently, press the [Adjust Each Dim.] key.




• Even when you enter the values with the Numeric keys ( - ), you can change the values with the [–] or [+] key.


• The default setting is 1/8" (4 mm).

● When you select the [Adjust Each Dim.] key:Select each side in turn and set the frame erase width using the [–] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key.



0 9 CClear

0 9


3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions



NOTE• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Frame Erase], and [Cancel] keys in that order.• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)

Making Copies Erasing the Book Frame



3 Press the [Book Frame Erase] key, and press the [Next] key.

Reset

Book FrameErase


Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3


4 Select the size of the book when opened, and press the [Next] key.


size] key.

5 Press each key (“Top”, “Left”, “Center”, “Right”, and “Bottom”) and set the desired book frame erase width using the [–] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key.

The values set here are specified independently around the original. To set a value uniformly around the original, press the [Adjust All At Once] key.




• Even when you enter the values with the Numeric keys ( - ), you can change the values using the [–] or [+] key.


• The default settings are 3/8" (10 mm) for “Center” and 1/8" (4 mm) for “Top”, “Left”, “Right” and “Bot-tom”.

● When you select the [Adjust All At Once] key:Press the [Sides] and [Center] key to set the desired frame erase width using the [–] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key.

0 9 CClear

0 9


3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions





NOTE• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Frame Erase], and [Cancel] keys in that order.• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)Reset


Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3


Making Copies Erasing Binding holes etc.

1 Place your originals on the platen glass and press the [Special Features] key.


3 Press the [Binding Erase] key, and press the [Next] key.

4 Specify the binding erase feature, and press the [Next] key.

NOTE• The position of the binding holes does not refer to

the position in which the original is placed on the platen glass, but to the position of the binding holes viewed when the surface of the original that you want to scan is face up, with the top edge at the top.

Binding Erase


3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


5 Set the desired binding erase width using the [–] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key.










NOTE• To cancel the setting, the [Special Features], [Frame Erase], and [Cancel] keys in that order.• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)

0 9 CClear

0 9

Reset



Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet (Image Combination)

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3

This mode automatically reduces two, four, or eight originals, two-sided originals, or the facing pages of a book to fit on one side or both sides of a selected paper size.

IMPORTANT• In the Image Combination mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Two-sided, Two-page Separation,

Cover/Sheet Insertion, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Original Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, Dif-ferent Size Originals, Image Separation, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set.

• Originals copied in the Image Combination mode must all be the same size. You cannot use the Image Combination mode with the Different Size Originals mode.

NOTE• The reduction ratio is automatically set so that the originals fit on the selected paper size.

● 2 On 1Reduces two 1-sided or one 2-sided originals to fit on one side or both sides of the sheet.

● 4 On 1Reduces four 1-sided or two 2-sided originals to fit on one side or both sides of the sheet.

Image Combi-nation

2

1

1 21

Originals Copy

or

4

3

2

1

43

21

3

1

CopyOriginals

or

Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet (ImageCombination)

3-33

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


● 8 On 1Reduces eight 1-sided or four 2-sided originals to fit on one side or both sides of the sheet.




2 Press the [Image Combination] key.

4

3

2

1

8

7

6

R E P O R T

5432

876

R E P O R T

5

1

R E P O R T

8

7

3

1

7

5

Originals Copy

or


3-34

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3


3 Select the size of the originals, and press the [Next] key.

NOTE• When copying the two-sided original with the

Image Combination mode, press the [2-Sided Original] key after selecting the original size.

• To select A or B series paper size, press the [A/B-size] key.

● When you select the [2-Sided Original] key:Select the type of original, and press the [OK] key.

4 Select the desired Image Combination feature, and press the [Next] key.

NOTE• To make a two-sided copy, press the [2-Sided

Copy] key.

● When you select the [2-Sided Copy] key:Select the type of two-sided orientation, and press the [OK] key.


3-35

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


● When you select the [Option] key:Select the image order, and press the [Done] key.

5 Select the paper size, and press the [OK] key.


IMPORTANT• You cannot set Automatic Paper Selection in the

Image Combination mode.

NOTE• The machine automatically selects the copy ratio

depending on the selected paper size.



NOTE• When you set the Image Combination mode, the

Shift mode is automatically set.

2 On 1

4 On 1, 8 On 1


3-36

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3




press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. • To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Image Combination], and [Cancel] keys in that


Start

Reset


3-37

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section on a Separate Copy Sheet (Image Separation)
This mode automatically divides an original into equal sections and copies each section in enlarged form on a separate sheet.
IMPORTANT• In the Image Separation mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Two-sided, Two-page Separation,

Cover/Sheet Insertion, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Frame Erase, Different Size Originals, Image Combination, and Image Repeat modes cannot be set.

• Originals copied in the Image Separation mode must all be the same size. You cannot use the Different Size Originals mode in combination with the Image Separation mode.

• Place the original on the platen glass. You cannot place the original in the feeder and copy it in the Image Separation mode.

The following Image Separation features are available: 1 to 2, 1 to 4, 2-Sided/ 1 to 2, and 2-Sided/ 1 to 4.

NOTE• The enlargement ratio is automatically set to match the designated paper size.

● 1 to 2Divides a one-sided original into two equal sections and outputs the sections in enlarged form as two 1-sided copies or one 2-sided copy.

NOTE• You can place LTR-size originals horizontally or vertically when using this feature. When placed vertically,

each page is divided into upper and lower sections.

Image Sepa-ration

2

1

1

1 2

Original Copy

or


3-38

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3


● 1 to 4Divides a one-sided original into four equal sections and outputs the sections in enlarged form as four 1-sided copies or two 2-sided copies.

NOTE• You can place LTR-size originals horizontally or vertically when using this feature.

1 Place your originals on the platen glass and press the [Special Features] key.

2 Press the [Image Separation] key.

4

3 3

2

1

43

21

1

Original Copy

or

Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section on aSeparate Copy Sheet (Image Separation)

3-39

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


3 Select the desired Image Separation feature, and press the [Next] key.

NOTE• To make two-sided copy, press the [2-Sided Copy]

key.

● When you select the [2-Sided Copy] key:Select the appropriate orientation, and press the [OK] key.

4 Select the layout for the last original, and press the [Next] key.

NOTE• You can reduce the output of pages without images

(blank output) by setting the layout of the last origi-nal.

1 To 2

1 To 4


3-40

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3


● When you select the [Option] key:Specify the image (print) order, and press the [Done] key.

5 Select the paper size, and press the [OK] key.


IMPORTANT• You cannot select the Automatic Paper Selection in

the Image Separation mode.

NOTE• The machine automatically selects the copy ratio

depending on the selected paper size.



1 To 2

1 To 4

Dividing an Original Into Equal Sections and Enlarging Each Section on aSeparate Copy Sheet (Image Separation)

3-41

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions



NOTE• When there are multiple originals, follow the instructions that appear on the display and press the

key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. • To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Image Separation], and [Cancel] keys in that order.• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)

Start

Reset


3-42


Feeding Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals)

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3

This function enables you to copy different-size originals with the same width or different-size origi-nals with different widths, together in one group.

IMPORTANT

• In the Different Size Originals mode, combined use with the Book 2-sided, Two-page Separation, Book-let, Image Combination, Image Separation, and Image Repeat modes cannot be set.

• All originals placed together in the feeder must be the same weight (paper type).• Align the top edge of the originals with the back edge of the feeder when placing different-width originals.• Set the different-size originals with the combinations as follows. Other combinations may damage the

originals.- 11''x17'' and LGL, LTR and LGL, LTR and LTRR.

• When you place different-width originals, the originals may slightly be moved when fed to the platen glass, and as a result, the images may be scanned and copied slantwise.

• You cannot select the Shift mode when you set the Automatic Paper Selection in combination with the Dif-ferent Size Originals mode.

• You cannot set the Staple mode when placing different-width originals.• The Auto Orientation will not be performed when you set the Different Size Originals mode.• When combined with 1to2-Sided originals, two-sided copying cannot be performed. The different-sized

originals will be printed as one-sided copies on their respective sizes.

1 Place your original in the feeder and press the [Special Features] key.



2 Press the [Different Size Originals] key.

Image SeparationDifferent Size Originals

Feeding Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals) 3-43

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


3 Select the type of the Different Size Originals, and press the [OK] key.


NOTE• When you set the same-width originals, press the

[Same Width] key.• When you set the different-width originals, press

the [Different Width] key.





press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. • To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Different Size Originals], and [Cancel] keys in that


Start

Reset

Feeding Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals)3-44


Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build)

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3

This mode enables you to scan originals that are too many to set at once, by dividing them into mul-tiple batches. You can use both the feeder and the platen glass for scanning. The originals are cop-ied as one document after all the batches have been scanned.

IMPORTANT• You cannot change the copy settings while scanning originals in the Job Build mode. You need to set the

necessary settings beforehand according to the type of original or the desired Finisher mode.• If you place the original in the feeder, remove the original sequentially from the original output area when

scanning is completed.• When you place different-size originals in the feeder, set the Different Size Originals mode.

NOTE• When you want to copy one-sided and two-sided originals as two-sided, set the 1 2-Sided mode before-

hand if the first batch of originals is one-sided. If the first batch is two-sided, set the 2 2-Sided mode beforehand. To scan next original(s), set or cancel the Two-sided Original mode according to the type of original.

• It is useful to store originals in a box and print them with the Merge Documents mode when you cannot prepare originals at once, or when you want to set different settings for each original. (See “Printing Multi-ple Documents as One Document (Merge Documents),” on p. 4-75.)

1 Place your first original and press the [Special Features] key.

Job Build

Originals Copies

Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build) 3-45

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


2 Press the [Job Build] key.



4 Press the key to start scanning the orig-inals.

NOTE• You can adjust the Exposure and the Image Qual-

ity. (See “Adjusting Exposure and Image Quality (Copy Exposure),” on p. 2-32.)

• You can change the setting of the original type (One-sided/ Two-sided). (See “Two-sided Copy-ing (Two-sided Mode),” on p. 2-38.)

• You can change the number of copy sets. (See “Entering the Copy Quantity,” on p. 2-36.)

• To cancel scanning, press the [Cancel] key or the key.

● When scanning Two-sided originals:Press the [2-Sided] key.

IMPORTANT• Do not forget to set or cancel the Two-sided Origi-

nal mode according to the type of originals.

3

6

9

C

Start

Stop

Clear

Start

Stop

Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build)3-46

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3


Select the type of two-sided original, and press the [OK] key.

5 When scanning is completed, set the next original.

6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the last original is scanned, then press the [Done] key.

NOTE• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features]

and [Job Build] keys in that order.• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the

key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)

Reset

Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build) 3-47

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


Storing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory)
You can store any possible combination of the Copy functions, up to nine settings, in a memory key, and name that key. It is useful when you want to store the Copy functions used frequently.
NOTE• The copy jobs stored in memory will not be erased even if you turn the power OFF.• You can store all functions (modes) except for the Interrupt mode.

Storing Copy Settings for a Copy Mode

1 Program the copy job that you want to store in the Basic Features or Special Features screen.

NOTE• In the display on the right, the Two-page Separation

and Margin modes are set.

2 Press the [Mode Memory] key.

3 Press the [Store/Erase] key.

Mode Memory

Storing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory)3-48

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3


4 Press the [Store] key.

5 Select the desired memory key from among memory keys [M1] to [M9], and press the [Next] key.

NOTE• The mode memory key where copy settings are

already stored shows a small, black square [ ■ ] in the lower right corner of the key.

• If you selected a memory key to which a copy mode has already been stored, its settings are dis-played.

• If there are more stored copy modes than currently displayed, you can scroll the list using the [ ▼] or [▲] keys.

● If you selected a memory key to which a copy mode has not yet been stored:The message to confirm whether or not you want to store the new copy setting is displayed.

■ To store:Select the [Yes] key. The new copy job is stored to the memory key.

■ To cancel storing:Select the [No] key, then select another key.

Storing/ Recalling Often Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory) 3-49

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


● If you selected a memory key to which a copy mode has already been stored:The message to confirm that you want to replace the old copy mode with the new copy mode is displayed.

■ To overwrite:Select the [Yes] key. The contents of the memory key are replaced with the new copy setting.

■ To cancel storing:Select the [No] key, then select another mem-ory key.

When storing is completed, the message “Stored in memory.” appears for about two seconds.

6 When the copy settings are stored, the mem-ory key storing the copy mode is highlighted and the stored settings are displayed.




Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3




Storing a Memory Key Name

1 Press the [Special Features] key.



3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions



4 Press the [Store Name] key.

5 Select the memory key ([M1] to [M9]) for which you want to assign a name, and press the [Next] key.




6 Enter the new name, and press the [OK] key.

NOTE• For details on how to enter characters on the touch

panel display, see “Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display,” on p. 10-6.

• The maximum number of characters you can assign for the name is 10.

• If you press the [OK] key without any characters entered, the name of the memory key will revert back to its default setting, e.g. [M1] or [M2].


Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3






Recalling a Copy Mode



3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions



3 Select the memory key where the copy setting you want to recall is stored.

4 Check the copy settings stored to the memory key. If the contents are correct, press the [OK] key.


NOTE• Recalling a copy job from memory cancels the cur-

rent copy mode.• After recalling a copy job from memory, you can

change its settings and make copies.• If you press another memory key, the copy mode

stored in that key is recalled.




Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3


Erasing a Copy Mode




4 Press the [Erase] key.


3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


5 Select the memory key of the copy mode that you want to erase, and press the [Next] key.

IMPORTANT• Check the copy settings before you erase them.




• If there are more stored copy modes than currently displayed, you can scroll the list using the [ ▼] or [▲] keys.

6 The message on the right appears to confirm that you want to erase the copy mode.Select the [Yes] key.

The stored copy mode is erased.

NOTE• The name of the memory key is not erased. For

details on how to change the name, see “Storing a Memory Key Name,” on p. 3-51.

• If you want to cancel erasing, select the [No] key.

The message “Erased.” is displayed for about two seconds on the touch panel display.


Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3


7 Press the [Cancel] key.





3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall)
You can recall up to three previously set copy modes and make copies using these settings.
IMPORTANT• One copy job is defined by setting the number of copies, exposure, zoom etc., and pressing the or

key when the Auto Clear function is on, or by calling up a copy job stored in memory. If one of these keys was not pressed, or if the Auto Clear function is not active, calling up a copy job by pressing the [Recall] key is not possible.

• Once stored, the three copy jobs are held in memory even if the power is turned OFF.• The Standard mode is not stored.• Copy modes already stored is not stored.


2 Press the [Recall] key.

Start

Reset

Recall

Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall)3-58

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3


3 Select one of the [1 Before], [2 Before] or [3 Before] keys. Check that the copy settings are correct, and press the [OK] key.


NOTE• You can also check which copy modes are stored

to memory other than the currently displayed copy mode by pressing the [ ▼] or [▲] key.




Recalling a Previous Copy Job (Recall) 3-59

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi)
This function enables you to make copies of the original inverting the black and the white areas.

2 Press the [▼] key to display the Special Fea-tures screen (2/2).

Nega/Posi

SCENE SCENE

Original Copy

Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi)3-60

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3


3 Press the [Nega/Posi] key.




NOTE• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [ ▼], and [Nega/Posi] keys in that order.• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)Reset

Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi) 3-61

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeat)
You can repeatedly copy the image of an original in either the lengthwise or widthwise direction. The following two setting methods are available for the Image Repeat mode.
● Automatic setting The original image is copied so that the maximum possible of copies fit in the selected paper size.

● Manual setting The original image is copied for the specified number of times.

IMPORTANT• In the Image Repeat (manual setting) mode, combined use with the Entire Image, Book 2-Sided, Two-

page Separation, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Shift, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Margin, Frame Erase, Different Size Originals, Image Combination, Image Separation, and Mirror Image modes cannot be set.

• In the Image Repeat (auto setting) mode, combined use with the Automatic Paper Selection and Auto modes in addition to the modes mentioned above cannot be set.

Image Repeat

Original Copy

CITY

CITY

CITY

Original Copy

Example : When “3 times” is specified.*Images overlap when copied.

CITY

CITY

CITY

CITY

Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeat)3-62

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3




3 Press the [Image Repeat] key.

4 Set the number of Image repeat times for each of the lengthwise and widthwise directions.

● Automatic setting Press the [Auto] key.

NOTE• To make repeated copies with the number of

repeats automatically set, select the paper size. The original image is then copied so that the maxi-mum possible number of copies fit in the selected paper size.

Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeat) 3-63

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


● Manual setting Press the [–] or [+] key to set the number of images.

NOTE• The number of times that the image can be set to

repeat is from 1 to 20.• Sometimes the designated image will overlap

depending on how many times you have manually set it to be repeated.


The display returns to the Special Features screen (2/2).




NOTE• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [ ▼], [Image Repeat], and [Cancel] keys in that order.• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)Reset

Making Copies with the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeat)3-64


Making Copies with Image Reversed (Mirror Image)

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3

This function copies images as if reflected in the mirror, reversing the right and left sides.

IMPORTANT• In the Mirror Image mode, combined use with the Cover/Sheet Insertion, Shift, Booklet, Margin, Frame

Erase, Image Combination, and Image Repeat modes cannot be set.

1 Place the original and press the [Special Fea-tures] key.


Mirror Image

Original Copy

Making Copies with Image Reversed (Mirror Image) 3-65

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


3 Press the [Mirror Image] key.




NOTE• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [ ▼], and [Mirror Image] keys in that order.• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)Reset

Making Copies with Image Reversed (Mirror Image)3-66


Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness)

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3

This mode allows you to make copies of original images with the contrast reproduced sharper or softer. To make copies with text or lines reproduced sharper, use the [High] key. To make copies with photographs or other half-tones reproduced softer, use the [Low] key.

● LowIf you make copies of an original containing half-tones such as a printed photograph using the Photo mode, moiré or screen clash may occur. However, by using the [Low] key, you can soften this moiré effect so that the copy is easier on the eyes.

● HighThis feature enhances the edges of original images so that faint or fine text is reproduced more sharply. This is particularly suited to blueprints or faint pencil-drawn originals.

Sharpness




Original Copy

Low set Low not set




Original Copy

High set High not set

Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness) 3-67

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions




3 Press the [Sharpness] key.

4 Use the [Low] or [High] key to adjust the sharpness, and press the [OK] key.

The display returns to the Special Features screen (2/2).

NOTE• To copy text and lines clearly, the setting should be

towards “High”. To copy photographs etc., the set-ting should be towards “Low”.

Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness)3-68

Use

ful C

opy

Fun

ctio

ns3





NOTE• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [ ▼], [Sharpness], and [Cancel] keys in that order.• You can also cancel the mode by pressing the key. (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)Reset

Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness) 3-69

3U

sefu

l Cop

y F

unct

ions


Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness)3-70

Usi

ng th

e M

ail B

ox F

unct

ions

4


Using the Mail Box FunctionsThis chapter describes the Mail Box functions with which you can temporarily store data for later printing.

Flow of Mail Box Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Storing Originals in the Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Printing Documents Stored in the Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Scanning Originals into a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Giving a Name to the Document to be Scanned (Document Name). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Specifying Document Size (Doc. Size Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Adjusting the Exposure and Image Quality before Scanning the Originals (Scanning Exposure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11Changing the Scanning Ratio (Copy Ratio). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15Scanning Two-sided Originals (Two-sided Original) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25Scanning Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Sheets in One Step (Two-page Separation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27Scanning Originals for Use as a Booklet (Booklet Scanning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines (Frame Erase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Print Sheet and Storing it (Image Combination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39Scanning Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43Scanning Originals Separately Set as One Document (Job Build) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47Scanning Originals after Making them Sharply Contrasted (Sharpness) . . . . . . . . . 4-49Storing/ Recalling Scanning Modes (Mode Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51

Printing a Document Stored, in a Box after Changing the Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61Selecting the Print Paper Size (Paper Select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61Collating Prints (Finisher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63Two-sided Printing (Two-sided Printing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67Adding Job Separator Sheets, Front and Back Covers to Printed Sets (Cover/Job Separator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69Making Prints for Use as a Booklet (Booklet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72Printing Multiple Documents as One Document (Merge Documents) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75Storing/ Recalling Often Used Print Setting in Memory (Mode Memory) . . . . . . . . . 4-77

4C H A P T E R

4-1

4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns

4. Using the Mail Box Functions


Checking the Print Result or the Image of the Stored Document (Sample Print) . . . . . .4-88

Checking the Document’s Detailed Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-90

Changing the Name of a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-91

Moving a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-93

Erasing a Document from a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-95

4-2


Flow of Mail Box Operations

Usi

ng th

e M

ail B

ox F

unct

ions

4

This section describes the flow of basic Mail Box operations dividing it in two parts; Scanning origi-nals and Printing.

NOTE• For details on the following items, see the indicated pages.

- Main Power and Control Panel Power (See p. 1-6.)- Loading Paper and Adding Toner (See Chapter 7.)- Routine Cleaning (See p. 8-25.)

Storing Originals in the BoxThe operation is the same as when making copies. First, place the originals you want to store in the feeder or on the platen glass, then set the desired modes. When the machine is used as a network printer, you can store data into the box from a computer.

1 Press the key.

2 Select the desired box number.

NOTE• When the desired box is not displayed, press the

[ ▼] or [▲] key.• When you enter the box number using the Numeric

keys ( - ), press the [OK] key after entering the box number.

• If a box is set with a password, a locked mark [ ] is displayed next to that box icon.

• If a document is stored in a box, that box is dis-played with the [ ] icon.

COPY MAIL BOX SCAN

MAIL BOX

0 9

Flow of Mail Box Operations 4-3

4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


3 Enter the password, then press the [OK] key.

NOTE• Enter the password used when the box was stored.

(See “Setting/ Storing the Box,” on p. 6-46.) If a password has not been stored, this operation is not necessary.

4 Press the [Scan] key.

5 Place your originals.

(See “Placing Originals,” on p. 1-11.)

6 Specify the scanning mode.

NOTE• You can set various modes when scanning the

original as when making copies.• When storing by designating the document name

when scanning, press the [Document Name] key. (See “Giving a Name to the Document to be Scanned (Document Name),” on p. 4-9.)

Flow of Mail Box Operations4-4

4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


7 Press the key.

When scanning is completed, the display returns to the screen in step 4.

IMPORTANT• You cannot change the settings such as the scan-

ning quantity and scanning paper size during scan-ning.

NOTE• When you want to stop scanning, press the

[Cancel] key or the key.

● When the screen on the right appears:

Press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.

NOTE• You can change the setting of the Two-sided/

One-sided modes, Image Quality and Scanning Exposure.

8 When scanning is completed, the scanned data is stored in the selected box.

NOTE• The stored document without designating the

name of document is automatically stored with the name of “year, month, date and time". For example, when the data was scanned at 1:35 (PM), 41 sec-onds, on August 12, 2000, its name is “20000812133541”.

• You can also change the name of the stored data. (See “Changing the Name of a Document,” on p. 4-91.)

• The stored data is deleted after 3 days. This can be changed between “no limit” and 30 days. (See “Set-ting/ Storing the Box,” on p. 6-46.)

3

6

9

C

Start

Stop

Clear

Start

Stop

Start


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


Printing Documents Stored in the BoxYou can print documents stored in a box from this machine. When the machine is used as a network printer, you can also specify printing from the computer. For details on how to operate the machine from personal computers, see the Remote UI Guide.

NOTE• You can select and print up to 32 documents in one box at a time. When you merge documents, you can

select and print up to 100 documents. However, when there are reserved jobs in the box, the number you can select and print varies depending on the number of documents in the reserved jobs.

• You can only select multiple documents when those documents are stored in the same box. To print multiple documents stored in different boxes, you need to move the documents to one of the boxes beforehand. (See “Moving a Document,” on p. 4-93.)

• When documents are printed without changing the settings, the documents sent from computers are printed with the settings set from the computers, and the documents scanned into memory are printed with the standard Local Print settings. (See “Setting a Standard Mode for Local Printing,” on p. 6-21.)

1 Press the key.

2 Press the desired box number.

NOTE• When the desired box is not displayed, press the

[ ▼] or [▲] key.• When entering the box number using the Numeric


• If a box is set with a password, a locked mark [ ] is displayed next to that box icon.

• If a document is stored in a box, that box is dis-played with the [ ] icon.

COPY MAIL BOX SCAN

MAIL BOX

0 9


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


3 Enter the password, then press the [OK] key.


(See “Setting/ Storing the Box,” on p. 6-46.) If a password has not been stored, this operation is not necessary.

4 Select the document you want to print.

NOTE• When there are more than 4 stored documents,

press the [ ▼] or [▲] key to display the other docu-ments.

• You can select multiple documents stored in the box.

• The selected documents are numbered in the order specified, and are printed in the order numbered.

• When you press the [Select All] key, you can select all documents in the box (The key changes to the [Clear Selection] key).

• You can cancel the selection by pressing the docu-ment again.

• When you press the [Clear Selection] key, you can cancel all selection of the documents (The key changes to the [Select All] key).

5 Press the [Print] key.


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


6 Press the [Start Print] key.

If there is a current job or a previously reserved job, the machine will start printing after that job is completed.

NOTE• You can enter the printing quantity using the

Numeric keys ( - ).• If you make a mistake entering the quantity, press

the key and enter the correct quantity.• When you press the [Sample Print] key, one print is

made for you to confirm the printing output or the settings and the image data of the stored docu-ment. (See “Checking the Print Result or the Image of the Stored Document (Sample Print),” on p. 4-88.)

• When you press the [Change P Settings] key, you can change each print setting. (See “Printing a Document Stored, in a Box after Changing the Set-tings,” on p. 4-61.)

• When you press the [Print & Erase] key, you can delete the printed data.

• When you select multiple documents and press the [Change The Copies] key, you can change the number of prints.

• You can change the exposure or cancel the printing during printing.(See Chapter 5 “Printing Effi-ciently”.)

When printing starts, the screen on the right appears.

NOTE• To cancel printing, press the [Cancel] key. (You

cannot cancel printing by pressing the key.)• To reserve the next print, press the [Done] key and

begin by selecting the box in which the desired document is stored. (See “Reserving a Box Print while Printing (Reserve Print),” on p. 5-9.)

When printing is completed, the display returns to the Box selection screen.

When you select one document.

When you select multiple documents.

0 9

CClear

Stop



Scanning Originals into a Box

Usi

ng th

e M

ail B

ox F

unct

ions

4

Giving a Name to the Document to be Scanned (Document Name)You can give a name to the document before scanning.

1 Prepare to scan the original into the box following the procedure below.

Select the desired box number Place the original

NOTE• When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box.

2 Press the [Document Name] key.

3 Enter the name, and press the [OK] key.

NOTE• For details on how to enter the characters, see

“Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display,” on p. 10-6.

• The maximum number of characters you can assign for a name is 24.

MAIL BOX

DocumentSize Select

Scanning Originals into a Box 4-9

4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


4 Start scanning the original.

(See “Storing Originals in the Box,” on p. 4-3.)

NOTE• To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning

mode.)• When you press the key, the display returns to Box selection screen.

Specifying Document Size (Doc. Size Select)You can select the document size when scanning transparencies, or when specifying the document size before scanning.

NOTE• The default setting is “Auto”.




2 Press the [Doc. Size Select] key.

Reset

MAIL BOX

DocumentSize Select

Scanning Originals into a Box4-10

4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


3 Select the document size, and press the [Done] key.

IMPORTANT• In the Automatic Document Size Selection mode,

combined use with the Booklet Scanning, Original Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, and Image Com-bination modes cannot be set.

• You cannot select the [Auto] key when scanning the following type of originals. Specify the size of the document manually.- Non-standard size originals- Highly transparent originals such as transparen-

cies- Originals with an extremely dark background- Originals smaller than STMT in size

NOTE• To select A or B series paper size, press the

[A/B-size] key.




mode.)• When you press the key, the display returns to Box selection screen.

Adjusting the Exposure and Image Quality before Scanning the Originals (Scanning Exposure)

Manual Adjustment of the Scanning ExposureYou can manually adjust the scanning exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.




Reset

MAIL BOX


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


2 Press the [Light] or [Dark] key.






mode.)• When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.

Selecting Image QualityYou can adjust image quality to the level best suited to the quality of text or photo originals. The following three modes are available for adjusting image quality.

● Text modeThis mode is best suited for scanning text originals. Blue prints or penciled originals can be scanned clearly.

● Text/Photo modeThis mode is best suited for scanning originals containing both text and photos.

● Photo modeThis mode is best suited for scanning photos printed on photographic paper, or photo originals containing half-tones (i.e. printed photos).

IMPORTANT• If you scan an original containing half-tones such as a printed photograph using the Photo mode, moiré

may occur. If this happens, you can soften this morié effect by using the Sharpness mode. (See “Scan-ning Originals after Making them Sharply Contrasted (Sharpness),” on p. 4-49.)

• Combinations of these three modes cannot be set. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.

NOTE• When you have selected the Text, Text/Photo or Photo mode, the scanning exposure can be adjusted only

by Manual Exposure Control. Automatic Exposure Control cannot be set.• When the “Photo Mode” of Mail Box Settings is set to “On”, you can select printed image or photo after

pressing the [ ] key. (See “Setting the Photo Mode of the Mail Box Function,” on p. 6-51.)• If the original is a transparency, select the Text, Text/Photo or Photo mode and adjust the exposure to the

most appropriate level.

LightDark

Reset


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns





2 Press the [ ] key.

3 Select the type of your original (Text, Text/Photo, Photo).

When the “Photo Mode” of Mail Box Settings is set to “On”, you can select the [Printed Img.] or [Photo] key. (See “Setting the Photo Mode of the Mail Box Function,” on p. 6-51.)

MAIL BOX

TextText/PhotoPhotoPrinted Img.


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


4 Press the [Light] or [Dark] key to adjust the scanning exposure.





NOTE• To cancel the setting, press the [A] key.• To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning


Automatic Adjustment of Exposure and Image Quality




2 Press the [A] key.

The scanning exposure is automatically adjusted to the level best suited to the quality of the original.

NOTE• If the original is a transparency, you may not be

able to use Automatic Exposure Control. If so, adjust the scanning exposure using Manual Expo-sure Control.

Reset

MAIL BOX

A


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns

Auto






Changing the Scanning Ratio (Copy Ratio)Scanning Originals after Enlarging/ Reducing them to a Standard Record Size (Preset Zoom)You can scan the originals after enlarging/reducing them to a standard record size.





3 To reduce, select a reduction ratio. To enlarge, select an enlargement ratio.

Reset

MAIL BOXPresetZoom

Copy Ratio


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns





NOTE• To return the scanning ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key.• To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning


Specifying the Scanning Ratio by % (Zoom Designation)You can reduce or enlarge images by any scanning ratio, in 1% increments. The available scanning ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder.





Reset

MAIL BOX

Zoom Designa-tion


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


3 Enter the ratio using the Numeric keys ( - ) or the [–] and [+] keys.

NOTE• Even if you entered the ratio with the Numeric keys

( - ), you can change the entered values with the [–] and [+] keys.

• If you make a mistake when entering values, press the key, and enter the correct value.


NOTE• If you enter a value outside the setting range, a

message prompting you to enter the appropriate value will appear on the screen.



NOTE• To return the scanning ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key.• To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning


0 9

0 9

CClear

Reset


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


Automatically Setting the Ratio Based on the Selected Record Size (Auto)In this mode, the machine automatically selects the appropriate scanning ratio based on the selected record size.The available scanning ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder.

IMPORTANT• You cannot scan highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, in the Auto mode. Use the Preset

Zoom or Zoom Designation mode.• To use the Auto mode, your originals must conform to a standard paper size.

NOTE• If an error occurs between the Auto scanning ratio and the actual scanning size, you can adjust this with


• The record sizes that can be used with Auto are 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMT/ STMTR. However, when scanning STMT-size original using the platen glass, you need to set the ”LTRR/STMT Original Selection” in the Additional Functions. (See “Distinguishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals,” on p. 6-16.)





3 Press the [Auto] key.

MAIL BOX


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


4 Select the record size, and press the [OK] key.


[A/B-size] key.



NOTE• To return the ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key.• To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio], [Auto], and [Cancel] keys in that order.• To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning

mode.)• When you press the key, the display returns the to the Box selection screen.• If the original was placed on the platen glass, the zoom ratio appears when the feeder is lowered, pro-

vided that the original size can be detected.• If the original was placed in the feeder, the zoom ratio appears when the key is pressed.• The zoom ratio can be set within the range of 25% to 400%.

Calculating the Scanning Ratio Based on the Original and Record Size (Zoom Program)If you enter measurements for the original and desired scan images (or sheets), the machine will automatically calculate and set the appropriate scanning ratio. The following two Zoom Program modes are available.The available scanning ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder.

• Scanning with the same XY scanning ratio (Zoom)Designate the same scanning ratio for the vertical and horizontal directions.

• Scanning with different XY scanning ratios (XY Zoom)Designate different scanning ratios for the vertical and horizontal directions.

NOTE• The designated sizes are converted to the scanning ratio (%) as follows:

- scanning ratio (%) = (scanning size ÷ original size) × 100

Reset

Start


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


■ Scanning with the same XY scanning ratio (Zoom)







MAIL BOX

Zoom ProgramZoom


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns

XY Zoom


5 Press the [Original Size] key and enter the original size, then press the [Record Size] key and enter the size to be recorded. Then press the [OK] key.



• If you make a mistake when entering values, press the [C] key in the touch panel, and enter the values again.


• For details on how to enter values in inches, see “Setting in Inches,” on p. 10-8.

• To designate the sizes of the horizontal direction (X) and the vertical direction (Y) independently, press the [XY Zoom] key.




NOTE• Place the original on the platen glass if the zoom ratio is more than 200%.• To return the scanning ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key.• To cancel the setting, press the [Zoom], [Other Zoom], [Zoom Program], and [Cancel] keys in that order. • To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning


■ Scanning with different XY scanning ratios (XY Zoom)




0 9 CClear

Reset

MAIL BOX


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns







4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns

Two-sided Origi-nals


6 Press the [X] (horizontal direction) key and [Y] (vertical direction) keys for both the original size and record size, and enter the values for X and Y with the Numeric keys.



• If you make a mistake when entering values, press the [C] key in the touch panel, and enter the correct values.


• For details on how to enter values in inches, see “Setting in Inches,” on p. 10-8.

• To set the same values for the X and Y axes, press the [Zoom] key.


7 Enter all values, and press the [OK] key.

8 Start scanning the original


NOTE• Place the original on the platen glass if the zoom ratio is more than 200%.• To return the scanning ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key.• To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio], [Other Zoom], [Zoom Program], and [Cancel] keys in that

order. • To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning


0 9 CClear

Reset


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


Enlarging/Reducing Originals at Scanning Ratios Set Independently for X and Y Axes (XY Zoom)If you set the XY Zoom mode, you can scan an original enlarging or reducing it to different XY scanning ratios.The available scanning ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder.

IMPORTANT• You cannot scan highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, in the XY Zoom mode. Specify the

scanning ratio.

NOTE• If an error occurs between the XY Zoom scanning and the actual scanning size, you can adjust this with







MAIL BOX


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns



5 Press the [X] and [Y] keys and enter each val-ues for X and Y. Then press the [OK] key.

NOTE• You can enter the numbers using the Numeric keys

( - ) on the control panel.• If you make a mistake when entering values, press

the [C] key in the touch panel, and enter the correct values.

• Even if you entered the ratio with the Numeric keys ( - ), you can change the entered values with the [–] and [+] keys.




NOTE• To return the scanning ratio to 100%, press the [Direct] key.• To cancel the setting, press the [Copy Ratio], [Other Zoom], [XY Zoom], and [Cancel] keys in that order. • To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning


Scanning Two-sided Originals (Two-sided Original)This feature automatically turns over two-sided originals placed in the feeder to scan each side separately.

IMPORTANT• In the Two-sided Original mode, combined use with the Two-page Separation, Booklet Scanning, and

Image Combination modes cannot be set.• Place the original horizontally when scanning originals such as LTRR/ STMTR size. If these originals are

placed vertically, the back side of the print will be printed upside down.

0 9

0 9

Reset


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns





2 Press the [2-sided Original] key.

3 Select the type of original, and press the [OK] key.




press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.• To cancel the setting, press the [2-sided Original] and [Cancel] keys in that order. • To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning


MAIL BOX

Start

Reset


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


Scanning Facing Pages in a Book onto Two Separate Sheets in One Step (Two-page Separation)This feature enables you to scan facing pages in a book or a magazine on separate sheets of paper.

IMPORTANT• In the Two-page Separation mode, combined use with the Two-sided Original, Booklet Scanning, Different

Size Originals, Binding Erase, and Image Combination modes cannot be set.• Place your originals on the platen glass. You cannot scan originals placed in the feeder using the

Two-page Separation mode.



NOTE• When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box.• If you want to record in page order, begin scanning from the first page and work your way forward.• Place the original face down so that the original’s top edge is against the back edge of the platen glass.



MAIL BOX

Two-page Sep-aration


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns




(See “Storing Originals in the Box,” on p. 4-3.)For the next two facing pages, place the original and press the key again. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.

NOTE• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features] and [Two-page Separation] keys in that order.• To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning


Scanning Originals for Use as a Booklet (Booklet Scanning)You can scan originals in such a way that, when printing the scanned data, the output papers can be easily made into a booklet. Specify the Booklet mode when printing the scanned data. (See “Making Prints for Use as a Booklet (Booklet),” on p. 4-72.)

IMPORTANT• In the Booklet Scanning mode, combined use with the Two-page Separation, Different Size Originals,

Frame Erase, and Image Combination modes cannot be set.• When you place the originals used in the vertical direction horizontally and scan them, the images of the

even number pages will be printed upside down. Place these originals vertically.




Start

Reset

MAIL BOX


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns

Frame Erase



3 Press the [Booklet Scanning] key.

4 Select the original size, and press the [Next] key.

NOTE• To scan two-sided originals, also press the

[2-Sided Original] key.• To select A or B series paper size, press the

[A/B-size] key.

● When you select the [2-Sided Original] key:Select the type of the original, and press the [OK] key.

Booklet Scan-ning


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

nsriginal Framerase


5 Select the booklet layout size, and press the [OK] key.

NOTE• The originals are recorded to match half the size of

selected paper size.• To select A or B series paper size, press the

[A/B-size] key.





press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. • To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Booklet Scanning], and [Cancel] keys in that order.• To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning


Start

Reset

OE


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines (Frame Erase)This mode erases shadows and lines that appear when scanning various types of originals. The following three Frame Erase features are available.

IMPORTANT• Combinations of these three modes cannot be set. If you select one of these modes, the previously set

mode is canceled.

● Original Frame EraseErases the dark borders and frame lines that appear around the printed paper when the original is smaller than the selected record paper size, then records it.

IMPORTANT• In the Original Frame Erase mode, combined use with the Automatic Document Size Select, Booklet

Scanning, Different Size Originals, and Image Combination modes cannot be set.

● Book Frame EraseErases the dark borders as well as center and contour lines that appear when printing facing pages in a bound original onto a single record paper, then records them.

IMPORTANT• In the Book Frame Erase mode, combined use with the Automatic Document Size Select, Booklet Scan-

ning, Different Size Originals, and Image Combination modes cannot be set.

● Binding EraseErases the shadows that appear in prints from binding holes in originals, then records them.

IMPORTANT• In the Binding Frame Erase mode, combined use with the Two-page Separation and Booklet Scanning

modes cannot be set.• Do not place originals with binding holes in the feeder, as this may damage the originals.


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


Erasing Frame Lines and Storing the Original (Original Frame Erase)






4 Press the [Original Frame Erase] key, and press the [Next] key.

MAIL BOX


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


5 Select the size of the original, and press the [Next] key.

NOTE• You can only set the Original Frame Erase mode

for original sizes shown in the touch panel display.• To select A or B series paper size, press the

[A/B-size] key.

6 Set the desired original frame erase width using the [–] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key.

The value set here is specified uniformly around the original.To set frame erase width value for the top, bottom, left and right sides of the original independently, press the [Adjust Each Dim.] key.







● When you select the [Adjust Each Dim.] key:Select each side in turn and set the frame erase width using the [–] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key.

0 9 CClear

0 9


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns





NOTE• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Frame Erase], and [Cancel] keys in that order.• To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning


Erasing the Book Frame and Storing the Original (Book Frame Erase)





Reset

MAIL BOX

Book FrameErase


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns

BindingErase



4 Press the [Book Frame Erase] key, and press the [Next] key.

5 Select the size of the book when opened, and press the [Next] key.


[A/B-size] key.


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


6 Press each key (“Top”, “Left”, “Center”, “Right”, and “Bottom”) and set the desired book frame erase width using the [–] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key.

The values set here are specified independently around the original. To set a value uniformly around the original, press the [Adjust All At Once] key.






• The default settings are 3/8" (10 mm) for “Center” and 1/8" (4 mm) for “Top”, “Left”, “Right” and “Bot-tom”.

● When you select the [Adjust All At Once] key:Press the [Sides] and [Center] key to set the desired frame erase width using the [–] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key.


0 9 CClear

0 9


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns

Image Combnation






Erasing the Shadows of Binding Holes and Storing the Original (Binding Erase)



NOTE• When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box.• Place the original on the platen glass.



Reset

MAIL BOX

i-


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


4 Press the [Binding Erase] key, and press the [Next] key.

5 Specify the binding erase feature, and press the [Next] key.

NOTE• The position of the binding holes does not refer to

the position in which the original is placed on the platen glass, but to the position of the binding holes viewed when the surface of the original that you want to scan is face up, with the top edge at the top.

6 Set the desired binding erase width using the [–] or [+] key, and press the [OK] key.







0 9 CClear

0 9


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns







Reducing Two, Four or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Print Sheet and Storing it (Image Combination)This mode automatically reduces two, four, or eight originals and records them to fit on one side or both sides of a selected record size.

IMPORTANT• In the Image Combination mode, combined use with the Automatic Document Size Select, Two-page Sep-

aration, Booklet Scanning, Different Size Originals, Original Frame Erase, and Book Frame Erase modes cannot be set.

• Originals printed in the Image Combination mode must all be the same size. You cannot use the Image Combination mode in combination with the Different Size Originals mode.

NOTE• The reduction ratio is automatically set so that the originals fit on the selected record size.

● 2 On 1Reduces two 1-sided or one 2-sided originals to fit on one side or both sides of the print sheet and records them.

● 4 On 1Reduces four 1-sided or two 2-sided originals to fit on one side or both sides of the print sheet and records them.

● 8 On 1Reduces eight 1-sided or four 2-sided originals to fit on one side or both sides of the print sheet and records them.

Reset


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns






3 Press the [Image Combination] key.

4 Select the size of the originals, and press the [Next] key.

NOTE• When reducing a two-sided original, press the

[2-Sided Original] key after selecting the original size.


MAIL BOX


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


● When you select the [2-Sided Original] key:Select the type of original, and press the [OK] key.

5 Select the desired Image Combination feature, and press the [Next] key.

● When you select the [Option] key:Select the image order, and press the [Done] key.

2 On 1

4 On 1, 8 On 1


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


6 Select the record size, and press the [OK] key.

NOTE• The document is scanned with the reduction ratio

automatically set depending on the selected record size.






press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key. • To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Image Combination], and [Cancel] keys in that

order.• To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning


Start

Reset


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


Scanning Different-size Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals)This function enables you to scan different-size originals with the same width, or different-size originals with different widths, together in one group.

IMPORTANT• In the Different Size Originals mode, combined use with the Manual Document Size Select, Two-page

Separation, Booklet Scanning, Original Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, and Image Combination modes cannot be set.

• All originals placed together in the feeder must be the same weight (paper type).• Align the top edge of the originals with the back edge of the feeder when placing different-width originals.• Set the different-size originals with different width with the combinations as follows. Other combinations

may damage the originals.- 11"x17" and LGL, LTR and LGL, LTR and LTRR.

• When you place different-width originals, the originals may slightly be moved when fed to the platen glass, and as a result, the images may be scanned slantwise.





3 Press the [Different Size Originals] key.

MAIL BOX

Different SizeOriginals


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


4 Select the type of the Different Size Originals, and press the [OK] key.

NOTE• When you set the same-width originals, press the

[Same Width] key.• When you set the different-width originals, press

the [Different Width] key.

5 Press the [Done] key




press the key once for each original. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Different Size Originals], and [Cancel] keys in that

order.• To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning


Start

Reset


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


Scanning Originals Separately Set as One Document (Job Build)This mode enables you to scan originals that are too many to set at once, by dividing them into multiple batches. You can use both the feeder and the platen glass for scanning. The originals are stored as one document after all the batches have been scanned.

IMPORTANT• You cannot change the scan settings while scanning originals in the Job Build mode. You need to set the

necessary settings beforehand according to the type of original and desired Finisher mode.• If you place the original in the feeder, remove the original sequentially from the original output area when

scanning is completed.• When you place different-size originals in the feeder, set the Different size Originals mode.

NOTE• When you want to scan one-sided and two-sided originals as two-sided, set the Two-sided Original mode

beforehand if the first batch of originals is two-sided. To scan next original(s), set or cancel the Two-sided Original mode according to the type of original.

• It is useful to store originals in a box and print them with the Merge Documents mode when you cannot prepare originals at once, or when you want to set different settings for each original. (See “Printing Multi-ple Documents as One Document (Merge Documents),” on p. 4-75.)





MAIL BOX

Job build


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


3 Press the [Job Build] key.


5 Press the key to start scanning the origi-nals.

NOTE• You can adjust the Exposure and the Image Qual-

ity. (See “Adjusting the Exposure and Image Qual-ity before Scanning the Originals (Scanning Exposure),” on p. 4-11.)

• You can change the setting of the original type (One-sided/Two-sided). (See “Scanning Two-sided Originals (Two-sided Original),” on p. 4-25.)

• To cancel scanning, press the [Cancel] key or the key.

● When scanning Two-sided originals:Press the [2-sided Original] key.

IMPORTANT• Do not forget to set or cancel the Two-sided Origi-

nal mode according to the type of original.

3

6

9

C

Start

Stop

Clear

Start

Stop


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


Select the type of two-sided original, and press the [OK] key.

6 When scanning is completed, set the next original.

7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 until the last original is scanned, then press the [Done] key.

NOTE• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features]

and [Job Build] keys in that order.• To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings]

key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scan-ning mode.)

• When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.

Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi)This function enables you to record the original inverting the black and the white areas.




Reset

MAIL BOXNega/Posi


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns



3 Press the [Nega/Posi] key.




NOTE• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features] and [Nega/Posi] keys in that order.• To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning

mode.)• When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.Reset


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


Scanning Originals after Making them Sharply Contrasted (Sharpness)This mode allows you to scan original images with the contrast reproduced sharper or softer. To scan originals with text or lines reproduced sharper, use the [High] key. To scan originals with photographs or other half-tones reproduced softer, use the [Low] key.

● LowIf you want to scan an original containing half-tones such as a printed photograph using the Photo mode, moiré or screen clash may occur. However, by using the [Low] key, you can soften this moiré effect so that the print is easier on the eyes.

● HighThis feature enhances the edges of original images so that faint or fine text is reproduced more sharply. This is particularly suited to blueprints or faint pencil-drawn originals.





3 Press the [Sharpness] key.

MAIL BOX

Sharpness


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


4 Use the [High] or [Low] key to adjust the sharpness, and press the [OK] key.

NOTE• To scan text and lines clearly, the setting should be

towards “High”. To scan photographs etc., the set-ting should be towards “Low”.




NOTE• To cancel the setting, press the [Special Features], [Sharpness], and [Cancel] keys in that order.• To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the Standard Scanning

mode.)• When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen.Reset


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


Storing/ Recalling Scanning Modes (Mode Memory)You can store any possible combination of the Scanning functions, up to nine settings, in a memory key, and name that key. It is useful when you want to store the settings used frequently.

NOTE• The scanning modes in memory will not be erased even if you turn the power OFF.• The scanning modes you can store in memory key is Document Size Select, Scanning Exposure, Image

Quality, Copy Ratio, 2-sided Original, Document Name, Two-page Separation, Booklet Scanning, Differ-ent Size Originals, Job Build, Nega/Posi, Sharpness, Frame Erase, and Image Combination.

■ Storing Scanning Modes

1 Call up the Scanning screen as follows:

Select the desired box number


2 Program the scan settings that you want to store in the Scanning screen or Special Fea-tures screen.

NOTE• In the display on the right, the Nega/Posi and Job

Build modes are set.


MAIL BOXNega/Posi

Mode Memory


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns





NOTE• The mode memory key where scan settings are

already stored shows a small, black square [■ ] in the lower right corner of the key.

• If you selected a memory key to which a scanning mode has already been stored, its settings are dis-played.

• If there are more stored scanning modes than cur-rently displayed, you can scroll the list using the [▼] or [▲] keys.

● If you selected a memory key in which a scan-ning mode has not yet been stored:The message to confirm whether or not you want to store the new scanning job is displayed.

To store: Select the [Yes] key. The new scanning setting is stored into the memory key.

To cancel storing: Select the [No] key, then select another key.


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


● If you selected a memory key in which a scan-ning mode has already been stored:The message to confirm that you want to replace the old scanning setting with the new scanning settings is displayed.

To overwrite: Select the [Yes] key. The contents of the memory key are replaced with the new scanning setting.

To cancel storing: Select the [No] key, then select another memory key.


7 When the scan settings are stored, the mem-ory key storing the scanning mode is high-lighted and the stored settings are displayed.




The display returns to the Scanning screen.


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


■ Storing a Memory Key Name







MAIL BOXNega/Posi


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns















4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns




■ Recalling a Scanning Mode






MAIL BOXNega/Posi


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


4 Select the memory key where the scan setting you want to recall is stored.

5 Check the scan settings stored to the memory key. If the contents are correct, press the [OK] key.


NOTE• "Recalling a scanning mode from memory cancels

the current scanning mode.• After recalling a scanning mode from memory, you

can change its settings and scan.• If you press another memory key, the scanning

mode stored in that key is recalled."



■ Erasing a Scanning Setting




MAIL BOXNega/Posi


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns







4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


6 Select the memory key of the scanning mode that you want to erase, and press the [Next] key.

IMPORTANT• Check the scan settings before you erase them.




• If there are more stored scanning modes than cur-rently displayed, you can scroll the list using the [▼] or [▲] keys.

7 The message on the right appears to confirm that you want to erase the scanning mode.Select the [Yes] key.

The stored scanning mode is erased.






4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns








Printing a Document Stored, in a Box after Changing the Settings

Usi

ng th

e M

ail B

ox F

unct

ions

4

You can select the modes when printing documents stored in a box.

Selecting the Print Paper Size (Paper Select)

1 Specify the desired document following procedure below.

Select the desired box number, then the desired document


2 Press the [Change P Settings] key.

3 Press the [Paper Select] key.

NOTE• When you press the [Initial Settings] key, the docu-

ment recorded from a personal computer returns to the former settings and the scanned document returns to the standard mode of the Local Printing.

MAIL BOX

Printing a Document Stored, in a Box after Changing the Settings 4-61

4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


4 Select the print paper size, and press the [Done] key.

● When you select the [StackBypass Setting] key:Select the paper size, and press the [Next] key.

NOTE• If there is a current job or a previously reserved job

which uses the stack bypass, select the [StackBy-pass Setting] key and set the desired paper.


Select the paper type, and press the [OK] key.


If there is a current job or a previously reserved job, the machine will start printing after that job is completed.(See “Printing Documents Stored in the Box,” on p. 4-6.)

NOTE• To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings]

key. (The machine returns to the standard mode of the Local Printing.)


Reset

Printing a Document Stored, in a Box after Changing the Settings4-62

4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns

rge Docu-nts


Collating Prints (Finisher)The Finisher mode can be selected to collate the prints in various ways by pages or print sets. (See “Collating Copies (Finisher),” on p. 2-48.)





3 Press the [Finisher] key.



MAIL BOX

Finisher

Meme


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


4 Select the desired collate feature, and press the [OK] key.

NOTE• When you selected the [Staple] key, press the

[Next] key.• The [Staple] key only appears when the Finisher

(option) is attached.• The [Rotate] key only appears when the Finisher

(option) is not attached.• The [Hole Punch] key only appears when the

Puncher Unit-B1 (option) unit is attached to the Finisher.

• The [Offset] key only appears when the Finisher (option) is attached.

● When you select the [Staple] key:Select the type of stapling( [Corner], [Double], [Saddle Stitch] ), and press the [OK] key.

IMPORTANT• You cannot set the Staple mode when printing on

transparencies, tracing papers, labels, and 3-hole punch.

• The maximum number of papers which can be sta-pled at a time is as follows:- 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR: 30 sheets- LTR : 50 sheets

■ When you select the [Corner] key:Select the staple position, and press the [OK] key.

IMPORTANT• STMTR-size paper cannot be corner-stapled.

When the Finisher and the Punch-er Unit-B1 are attached.

When the Finisher is not attached.


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


■ When you select the [Double] key:Select the staple position, and press the [OK] key.

IMPORTANT• LGL/ LTRR/ STMTR-size paper cannot be dou-

ble-stapled.

■ When you select the [Saddle Stitch] key:Press the [Next] key.

IMPORTANT• You cannot select the [Saddle Stitch] key when the

Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached.• LGL/ LTR/ STMTR-size paper cannot be saddle

stitched.

NOTE• You can set the [Saddle Stitch] key when you select

the [Two-sided Printing] key. (See “Two-sided Print-ing (Two-sided Printing),” on p. 4-67.)

• You can adjust the saddle stitch position. (See “Changing the Saddle Stitch Position,” on p. 6-33.)

Select the paper size, and press the [OK] key.


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


● When you select the [Rotate] key:When the Automatic Paper Selection is set, press the [Next] key. Then select the LTR or LTRR-size paper, and press the [OK] key.

NOTE• Press the [OK] key after selecting the [Rotate] key

in the following case:- Available paper size is selected manually.- Available paper size is loaded for both horizontal

and vertical direction.- Drawer Eligibility for APS/ADS of the paper

drawer loaded with available paper size is set to “On”.

● When you select the [Hole Punch] key:Punches holes (2 or 3 holes) in the printed sheets.

IMPORTANT• The machine automatically selects the type of hole

punch (2 or 3 holes) depending on the selected paper size.- 2 holes: LGL/ LTRR- 3 holes: 11"x17"/ LTR

• You cannot punch holes in STMTR-size paper.• Holes cannot be punched in transparencies, trac-

ing papers, labels, and 3-hole punch.



NOTE• To cancel the setting, press the [Finisher] and

[Cancel] keys in that order.• To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings]



Reset


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


Two-sided Printing (Two-sided Printing)IMPORTANT

• In the Two-sided Printing mode, combined use with the Booklet mode cannot be set.• Non-standard paper sizes cannot be used to make two-sided prints.

NOTE• Print paper used to make two-sided prints must conform to the following specifications.

- Paper size : 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR- Paper weight : 17-lb bond to 110-lb index (64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2)There are some types of paper which may meet the above specifications, but cannot be used to print in the Two-sided Printing mode.

• When printing an odd numbered document, the back of the last page is left blank. (The machine’s counter does not count the blank page as a print.)

• Two-sided printing (printing on both sides of paper) when there are different-sized originals for the front and back sides, will result in each original being printed on one side of paper that matches its size. When you want to make prints on both sides of the paper with different-sized originals, make sure to select the paper size you want to print on, before printing.





3 Press the [Two-sided Printing] key.



MAIL BOX

Two-sided Printing


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


4 Select the appropriate orientation, and press the [OK] key.

NOTE• If you want to print the first page of each document

on the front when documents are to be merged and also the Finisher mode (except for the Group mode) is selected, press the [Non Continuous] key. If you want to print continuously without inserting any blank pages between the documents, press the [Continuous] key.



NOTE• To cancel the setting, press the [Two-sided Print-

ing] and [Cancel] keys in that order.• To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings]



Reset


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


Adding Job Separator Sheets, Front and Back Covers to Printed Sets (Cover/Job Separator)When you select multiple documents and set the Merge Documents mode, you can program the machine to automatically add front and back covers, or job separator sheets to divide each document, using a different type of paper stock from which is used for the main text.

IMPORTANT• You can set this mode only when you select multiple documents and set the Merge Documents mode.

(See “Printing Multiple Documents as One Document (Merge Documents),” on p. 4-75.)• In the Cover/Job Separator mode, combined use with the Non-collate, Group, Offset Group, Memory Col-

lating, Memory Grouping, and Booklet modes cannot be set.• You cannot print on front covers, back covers, or job separator sheets.• Stapling is not possible when the total number of output papers including insertion sheets exceeds 30

sheets (for 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR size) or 50 sheets (for LTR size).

1 Specify the desired documents following procedure below.

Select the desired box number, then the desired documents



3 Press the [Merge Documents] key.

NOTE• The [Merge Documents] key only appears when

you select multiple documents.• When you press the [Initial Settings] key, the docu-


MAIL BOX

Cover/JobSeparator


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns



5 Press the [Cover/Job Separator] key.

6 Select the desired Cover/Job Separator fea-ture, and press the [Next] key.

NOTE• You cannot print on front covers, back covers, or

job separator sheets.• You can cancel a mode by pressing the mode key

again.

7 Select the paper source for each insertion sheet, and press the [OK] key.

NOTE• Select the same paper size for the front and back

covers and the job separator sheets.• The display will vary depending on the mode

selected.


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns





NOTE• To cancel the setting, press the [Cover/Job Separa-

tor] and [Cancel] keys in that order.• To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings]



Reset


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


Making Prints for Use as a Booklet (Booklet)You can make prints which can easily be made into a booklet.

IMPORTANT• In the Booklet mode, combined use with the Collate, Two-sided Printing, and Cover/Job Separator modes

cannot be set.• You cannot set the Booklet mode for a record size other than LTR/ STMT.• Saddle stitching will not be performed when there is only one sheet. The sheet will only be folded.

NOTE• When you want to print document for use as a booklet, we recommend that you scan the original with the

Booklet Scanning mode beforehand. (See “Scanning Originals for Use as a Booklet (Booklet Scanning),” on p. 4-28.)








MAIL BOX

Booklet


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


4 Press the [Booklet] key.


Press the [OK] key and proceed to step 6 when the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached.

IMPORTANT• The paper used for the cover page must be the

same size as the other pages.• The paper used for the main text must be from

17-lb to 20-lb bond (64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2).• The paper used for the cover page must not be

heavier than 110-lb index (200 g/m2).• You cannot print on the cover pages.• When you select the [Add Cover] key, you cannot

set the paper used for the main text in the stack bypass.

NOTE• To add a cover page, press the [Add Cover] key.• Place the paper face down for the cover page in the

stack bypass.• 11''x17''/ LTRR-size paper can be selected.

● When you select the [Add Cover] key:Select the type of paper, and press the [Next] key.

Press the [OK] key and proceed to step 6 when the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached.


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


6 Select whether or not to saddle stitch the booklet, and press the [OK] key.

IMPORTANT• The saddle stitching cannot be set when the Sad-

dle Finisher-F2 (option) is not attached.• When the number of sheets exceeds 15, the sta-

pling will not be performed, and the sheets will be output to the output tray.

NOTE• The available number of output load on the booklet

tray in the saddle stitching is as follows:- Number of sheets Number of load

1- 5 25 sets6-10 15 sets

11-15 10 sets• Saddle Stitching will not be performed when there

is only one sheet. The sheet will only be folded.




NOTE• To cancel the setting, press the [Booklet] and [Can-

cel] keys in that order.• To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings]


• When you press the key, the display returns to the Box selection screen

Reset


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


Printing Multiple Documents as One Document (Merge Documents)You can print multiple documents, such as scanned documents and documents sent from a computer etc. as one document. This mode enables you to combine documents with different settings as one document, so it is useful when you want to print documents as the following:- When printing and stapling data created with different softwares, or data made by multiple people

as one document.- When printing paste-up or transparency originals and data sent from a computer as one document

with the Booklet mode set.

IMPORTANT• You can set this mode only when you select multiple documents.• When you use this function to combine the documents, the settings for each document are cleared, and

prints are made with the Standard mode settings. When printing is completed, the settings of each docu-ment return to the settings set when stored.

• You can change the settings of the Standard mode. (See “Setting a Standard Mode for Local Printing,” on p. 6-21.)

1 Specify the desired box following procedure below.



2 Specify the documents in the order to be merged, and press the [Print] key.

NOTE• The selected documents are numbered in the order

specified.• When you press the [Select All] key, you can select

all documents in the box (The key changes to the [Clear Selection] key).

• You can cancel the selection by pressing the docu-ment again.

• When you press the [Clear Selection] key, you can cancel all selection of the documents (The key changes to the [Select All] key).

MAIL BOX


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns



4 Press the [Merge Documents] key.



NOTE• When printing multiple documents as one docu-

ment, “name of document” displayed during print will only display the first specified document name.

• To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the standard mode of the Local Printing.)


Reset


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


Storing/ Recalling Often Used Print Setting in Memory (Mode Memory)You can store any possible combination of the Print settings, up to nine settings, in a memory key, and name that key. It is useful when you want to store the settings used frequently.

NOTE• The printing modes in memory will not be erased even if you turn the power OFF.• The printing modes you can store in memory key is The number of printouts, Two-sided Print, Finisher,

Booklet, Cover/Job Separator, Sample Print, Merge Documents, and Delete After Printing.

■ Storing Print Settings





3 Program the print settings that you want to store in the Change Print Setting screen or Special Features screen.

NOTE• In the display on the right, the Finisher and

Two-sided Printing modes are set.

MAIL BOX

Mode Memory


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns







4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns



NOTE• The mode memory key where print settings are


• If you selected a memory key to which a print mode has already been stored, its settings are displayed.

• If there are more stored printing modes than cur-rently displayed, you can scroll the list using the [▼] or [▲] keys.

● If you selected a memory key in which a print mode has not yet been stored:The message to confirm whether or not you want to store the new print setting is displayed.

To store: Select the [Yes] key. The new print set-ting is stored into the memory key.

To cancel storing: Select the [No] key, then select another key.

● If you selected a memory key in which a print mode has already been stored:The message to confirm that you want to replace the old print setting with the new print setting is displayed.

To overwrite: Select the [Yes] key. The contents of the memory key are replaced with the new print setting.

To cancel storing: Select the [No] key, then select another memory key.


9 When the print settings are stored, the mem-ory key storing the print mode is highlighted and the stored settings are displayed.


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns





The display returns to the Print Settings screen.

■ Storing a Memory Key Name





MAIL BOX


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns







4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns





• If you selected a memory key to which a print mode has already been stored, its settings are displayed.











4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


■ Recalling a Printing Mode







MAIL BOX


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


5 Select the memory key where the print setting you want to recall is stored.

6 Check the print settings stored to the memory key. If the contents are correct, press the [OK] key.


NOTE• Recalling a print mode from memory cancels the

current print mode.• After recalling a print mode from memory, you can

change its settings and make print.• If you press another memory key, the print mode

stored in that key is recalled.




4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


■ Erasing a Printing Mode







MAIL BOX


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns




7 Select the memory key of the print mode that you want to erase, and press the [Next] key.

IMPORTANT• Check the print settings before you erase them.



• If you selected a memory key to which a printing job has already been stored, its settings are dis-played.

• If there are more stored print modes than currently displayed, you can scroll the list using the [▼] or [▲] keys.


4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


8 The message on the right appears to confirm that you want to erase the print mode.Select the [Yes] key.

The stored print mode is erased.










4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


Checking the Print Result or the Image of the Stored Document (Sample Print)
You can print one set of print output when you want to check the image before printing, or when you want to check the settings and the image data of the document stored in the box.
IMPORTANT• The [Sample Print] key only appears when you set the Collate or Staple mode. This key does not appear

when the Group mode is set. In addition, when you select multiple documents, this key does not appear unless you set the Merge Documents mode.

NOTE• You can make a sample print even when the number of print sets is one.




2 Press the [Sample Print] key, and press the [Start Print] key.

Sample set printing starts and one print set is made.

NOTE• The number of print is not changed even when the

sample set is made.

3 Check the printed paper, and press the [Start Print], [Cancel] or [Change Settings] key.

NOTE• To output the prints, press the [Start Print] key.• To cancel the printing, press the [Cancel] key.• To change the settings, press the [Change Set-

tings] key.

MAIL BOX

Sample Print

Checking the Print Result or the Image of the Stored Document (Sample Print)4-88

4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


● When you select the [Change Settings] key:Change the desired settings, then press the [Done] key.

NOTE• When you made a sample print without changing

the settings, press the [Change P Settings] key, then change the settings.

• To cancel the settings, press the [Initial Settings] key. (The machine returns to the standard mode of the Local Printing.)



NOTE• When you want to check the changed settings,

press the [Sample Print] key again.

When selecting one document and printing without changing the settings

When selecting multiple documents and printing after changing the settings

When selecting one document and printing after changing the settings

Checking the Print Result or the Image of the Stored Document (SamplePrint)

4-89

4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


Checking the Document’s Detailed Information
You can check the detailed information of documents stored in the box.

Select the desired box number Select the desired document

NOTE• When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box.• When you select multiple documents and press the [Details] key, only the details of the selected (high-

lighted) document are displayed.

2 Press the [Details] key.

3 Check the detailed information, and press the [Done] key.

Repeat this until the Box selection screen appears again.

MAIL BOX

Checking the Document’s Detailed Information4-90


Changing the Name of a Document

Usi

ng th

e M

ail B

ox F

unct

ions

4

You can change the name of a document stored in the box.



NOTE• When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box.• When you select multiple documents and press the [Details] key, only the details of the selected (high-

lighted) document are displayed.

2 Press the [Details] key.

3 Press the [Change document name] key.

4 Enter the document name that you want to change, and press the [OK] key.




• You cannot store a document without a name.• If you want to cancel storing, press the [Cancel]

key.

MAIL BOX

Changing the Name of a Document 4-91

4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns



Repeat this until the Box selection screen appears again.

Changing the Name of a Document4-92


Moving a Document

Usi

ng th

e M

ail B

ox F

unct

ions

4

You can move a desired document to a different box.



NOTE• When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box.• If you press the [Select All] key, you can select all documents in a box (The key changes to the [Clear

Selection] key).

2 Press the [Move Document] key.

3 Specify the box to which you want to move the document.

NOTE• You cannot move a document to multiple boxes.

MAIL BOX

Moving a Document 4-93

4U

sing

the

Mai

l Box

Fun

ctio

ns


4 Press the [Start] key.

The screen on the right appears.

NOTE• If a document cannot be moved to the desired box,

a message telling you that you cannot move the document will be displayed.

• If a document cannot be moved, it will remain in the original box.

• If an error occurs while moving multiple documents, the number of documents which have been moved is displayed.


The display returns to the Box selection screen.

Moving a Document4-94


Erasing a Document from a Box

Usi

ng th

e M

ail B

ox F

unct

ions

4

You can erase a document stored in a box.



NOTE• When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box.• If you press the [Select All] key, you can select all documents in a box (The key changes to the [Clear

Selection] key).


3 Check the document, and press the [Yes] key.

NOTE• If you do not want to erase the document, press the

[No] key.


The display returns to the Box selection screen.

MAIL BOX

Erasing a Document from a Box 4-95


5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently


Printing EfficientlyThis chapter describes operations to make print jobs more efficient.

Changing the Exposure During Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies (Interrupt Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Reserving a Job while the Machine is Warming Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Making a Copy Reservation while the Machine is Warming Up (Auto Start) . . . . . . . . 5-5Reserving a Print Job of a Document Stored in a Box while the Machine is Warming Up (Auto Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Reserving the Next Job during Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Reserving a Copy Operation during Printing (Reserve Copy). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Reserving a Box Print while Printing (Reserve Print) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Checking and Changing Printing Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Checking Detailed Information for Printing Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Canceling Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15Priority Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Operating Print Jobs Sent from a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Printing Secured Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Checking and Canceling Spool Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Checking the Printing History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Checking the Device Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

5C H A P T E R

5-1

5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently


Changing the Exposure During Printing
You can change the copy or print exposure during printing.
1 Press the [Light] or [Dark] key on the right screen which appears during printing.

The printing exposure is changed.



When printing is completed, the display returns to the Basic Features screen if the last used function was the Copy function, or to the Box selection screen if it was the Mail Box function.

NOTE• Adjusting the exposure after printing has started

will produce a different result from the result before scanning the original.

In the Copy function

In the Mail Box function

Changing the Exposure During Printing5-2


Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies (Interrupt Mode)

5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently

The Interrupt mode enables you to interrupt the reserved or current job long enough to make other priority copies. This mode is useful when making a rush copy during a long copy job.

IMPORTANT• When making interrupt copy while the user restrictions are enabled with the control card, make copies

without exchanging the control cards.

NOTE• You can make interrupt copies if the machine is ready to scan.• You can set the modes for the Interrupt copy even while an original is being scanned into memory or into

a box.

1 Press the key.

The key remains constantly lit.

NOTE• When you want to copy after changing the

Department ID while the Department ID Man-agement is enabled, press the key and enter the Department ID and Password. (See “Entering the Department ID and Password,” on p. 10-4.)

• Even when you press the key, the job currently being output will not be interrupted until the inter-rupt copy starts.

2 Place your original, then set the necessary copy mode.

NOTE• You can cancel the Interrupt mode by pressing the

key.• You can cancel only the copy mode by pressing the

key. (The Interrupt mode will not be can can-celed.)

Interrupt Mode

?

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0ID

9

C

Guide


Interrupt

Processing/Data Error

Clea

Interrupt

Interrupt

ID

Interrupt

Interrupt

Reset

Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies (Interrupt Mode) 5-3

5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently


3 Press the key.

When the Interrupt copy job starts, the key stops flashing.

4 Once the original is scanned, remove it from the machine.

IMPORTANT• When the interrupt copy job is completed, the inter-

rupted printing operation restarts.• If you want to continue the interrupt copy, wait until

the current interrupt copy job is completed (end of printing).

3

6

9

C

Start

Stop

Clear

Start

Interrupt

Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies (Interrupt Mode)5-4


Reserving a Job while the Machine is Warming Up

5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently

Even while the machine is warming up, an original can be scanned, or you can make print settings.

IMPORTANT• If you scan originals while the machine is warming up, the time for the machine to warm up will be longer.

NOTE• Jobs can be reserved during the following status:

- While the machine is warming up.- While the machine returns from each energy-saving status.- While the machine is warming up after a maintenance, inspection, or troubleshooting job.

Making a Copy Reservation while the Machine is Warming Up (Auto Start)

1 Place your originals and select the desired copy mode.

NOTE• While the machine is warming up, you can reserve

up to five copy jobs including the currently scan-ning original. However, an interrupt copy job is not counted.

• You can set a different mode for each job.

2 Press the key.

The message “Scanning...” appears on the display.

A display shown on the right appears on the touch panel display, depending on the copy mode. To scan the next original, press the key again. When scanning is completed, press the [Done] key.

NOTE• To cancel copying, press the [Cancel] key on the

touch panel display or the key.

Auto Start

Start

Start

Stop

Reserving a Job while the Machine is Warming Up 5-5

5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently


3 After the machine has finished warming up, printing starts.

NOTE• If warm up ends while scanning is still in progress, printing starts at that point.• You can change the exposure during printing. (See “Changing the Exposure During Printing,” on p. 5-2.)

Reserving a Print Job of a Document Stored in a Box while the Machine is Warming Up (Auto Print)

1 Specify the desired document with the procedure below.



2 To print without changing the settings, press the [Start Print] key. If you want to change set-tings before making a print, press the [Change P Settings] key and set the desired mode, then press the [Start Print] key.

NOTE• To make a sample print, press the [Sample Print]

key. (See “Checking the Print Result or the Image of the Stored Document (Sample Print),” on p. 4-88.)

• To erase the data after printing, press the [Print and Erase] key.

• To print after changing the settings, see “Printing a Document Stored, in a Box after Changing the Settings,” on p. 4-61.

MAIL BOX

Auto Print

Reserving a Job while the Machine is Warming Up5-6


Reserving the Next Job during Printing

5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently

While the machine is printing, you can scan other originals or make print settings. You can print the reserved job as soon as the current job is completed, so that you can reduce the time and effort needed to scan the originals.

NOTE• You can reserve up to five copy jobs for the Copy function including the current job. For the Mail Box func-

tion, you can reserve up to 32 documents regardless of the number of reserved jobs. However, interrupt copy jobs are not counted.

• You can set a different mode for each job.

Reserving a Copy Operation during Printing (Reserve Copy)IMPORTANT

• When reserving a copy job while the user restrictions are enabled with the control card, do not remove that control card after that job is completed. If you remove the control card during printing, the job reserva-tion will be canceled.

1 Press the [Done] key on the right screen which appears during printing.

NOTE• If the job displayed in the touch panel is the job of

functions other than the Copy function, press the key to display the Basic Features screen.

2 Place your originals on the platen glass or in the feeder and set the desired copy mode.

ReserveCopy

COPY

Reserving the Next Job during Printing 5-7

5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently


3 Press the key and start scanning origi-nals.

NOTE• If the screen on the right appears, press the [OK]

key and repeat the operation after the current job is completed.

3

6

9

C

Start

Stop

Clear

Start

Reserving the Next Job during Printing5-8

5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently


Reserving a Box Print while Printing (Reserve Print)


NOTE• If the job displayed in the job monitor is the job of

functions other than the Mail Box function, press the key to display the Box selection screen.

2 Specify the desired document with the procedure below.


NOTE• When you select a box set with a password, enter the password after selecting the box.• If the Box selection screen appears after step 1, specify the desired box number.• To print without changing the settings, press the [Start Print] key. If you want to change settings before

making a print, press the [Change P Settings] key and set the desired mode.


ReservePrint

MAIL BOX

Reserving the Next Job during Printing 5-9

5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently


Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs
When paper is fed from the stack bypass for the current print job or for a reserved job, you can des-ignate the paper to be placed in the stack bypass for the next reserved job.
1 Press the [StackBypass Setting] key on the Paper Selection screen that appears when set-ting reserved print settings.

When there is no reserved print job, you can designate the paper size by pulling it out and re-inserting it.

NOTE• When Standard Stack Bypass Settings is set to

"On", and the [Stack Bypass] key is selected, the paper stored in the standard settings is displayed. (See “Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack bypass,” on p. 6-19.)



size] key.

• When storing paper as the Standard Stack Bypass Settings, the paper size/type will be displayed. (See “Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack bypass,” on p. 6-19.)

3 Select the paper type, and press the [OK] key.

StackBypassSetting

Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs5-10

5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently


The paper sizes previously set and the last set are displayed as shown in the screen on the right.


Finish the reserved print settings.

5 Press the key.

NOTE• When reserving jobs of the Mail Box function, press

the [Start Print] key.

Paper size loaded presently

Paper size selected

3

6

9

C

Start

Stop

Clear

Start

Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs 5-11

5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently


6 Set the specified paper when its turn comes to print.

NOTE• The specified paper size is displayed when its turn

comes to print.



size] key.

8 Select the paper type, and press the [OK] key.

The machine starts printing.

Using the Stack Bypass while Reserving Print Jobs5-12


Checking and Changing Printing Status

5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently

You can check and change the printing status (Stand-by, Printing, etc.) using the System Monitor screen.

Checking Detailed Information for Printing Documents

1 Press the [System Monitor] key.

2 Select the [Copy] or [Print] key.

NOTE• When checking the print status for copy jobs, press

the [Copy] key.• When checking the print status for all jobs, press

the [Print] key.

3 Select the [Status] key.

System Monitor

Checking and Changing Printing Status 5-13

5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently


4 Select the document you want to check the detailed information for and press the [Details] key.

NOTE• The status of each icon displayed in the screen is

as follows:: Operating: Waiting: Error: Paused: Canceling: Secured job: Copy job: Mail Box job: Printer job: Report job


Repeating this operation returns the display to the Basic Features screen.

Details of a Copy document

Details of a Box document

Checking and Changing Printing Status5-14

5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently


Canceling Printing


2 Select the [Copy] or [Print] key.

NOTE• When checking the print status for copy jobs, press

the [Copy] key.• When checking the print status for all jobs, press

the [Print] key.


4 Select the document to be canceled, and press the [Cancel] key.

NOTE• You cannot select multiple documents and cancel

them all in one action.


5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently


5 Press the [Yes] key.

NOTE• To cancel the cancellation, press the [No] key.• The canceled document is displayed as “NG” on

the Print Log screen.


Repeating this operation returns the display to the Basic Features screen.

Priority PrintingNOTE

• When you set the priority printing, the machine starts printing it after the currently printing document is completed.


Priority Printing


5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently




4 Select the document for priority printing and press the [Print Next] key.




5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently


Operating Print Jobs Sent from a ComputerYou can temporarily stop the print job sent from a computer, or skip an error when a print error occurs.





5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently


4 Select the desired document, and press the [Details] key.

5 Press the [▼] key.

Perform operations of the print job.When you finish operating the document, press the [Done] key.

NOTE• When you press the [Pause] key, printing stops

temporarily, and the key changes to the [Resume] key. When you press the [Resume] key, printing restarts.

• You can continue the print job even when a print error occurred, by pressing the [Auto Continue] key, depending on the type of error. However, the print output may not be the same as expected.

• When printing is canceled from the computer or when the data is less than the volume of one page, that job may not be correctly performed. When you press the [Form Feed] key, you can force the print data remaining in memory to be output.




5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently


Printing Secured DocumentsYou can print documents with a password sent from a computer. Documents with a password are called secured documents.Secured documents waiting to be printed are displayed with a mark at the left of the job number.To print these documents, you need to enter a password, which prevents other people who do not know the password from observing the contents.

IMPORTANT• If the main power is turned OFF, the secured documents are erased.• The secured document will be erased after the printing is completed.• You cannot change the settings of the secured document.




Job MonitorSecured Documents


5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently


4 Select the desired secured document, and press the [Secured Print] key.

5 Enter a password, and press the [OK] key.

If there is a current job or a previously reserved job, the machine will start printing after that job is completed.

IMPORTANT• Enter the same password set in the operation from

the computer. The machine becomes ready to print the document.

NOTE• To cancel the printing, press the [Cancel] key.

Checking and Canceling Spool StatusWhen print data is sent to this machine from a computer, the machine will process the input/output data after temporarily storing it.

NOTE• “Spool Status” will be displayed only when the printer function is attached.



5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently



3 Select the [Spool Status] key.

4 Press the [ ] key.

● When you cancel spool job:Select the [Status] key.

E82_Chap05.US Page 22 Tuesday, May 29, 2001 4:04 PM

5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently


Select the document to be canceled, and press the [Cancel] key.

Press the [Yes] key.

NOTE• To cancel the cancellation, press the [No] key.

● When you check the detailed information: Select the [Status] or [Log] key.

Select the document you want to check the detailed information for and press the [Details] key.


5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently


√


The display return to the Basic Features screen.

Details of a status

Details of a log


5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently


Checking the Printing History



3 Press the [Log] key.

4 Press the [Job Type] key.


5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently


5 Select the type of job that you want to check the log.

NOTE• The [Printer] key is displayed only when the net-

work printer function is enabled.

6 After checking the printing job history, press the [Done] key.


NOTE• When the document has been printed correctly,

“OK” is shown. “NG” is shown for documents of which printing has been canceled.

• In the Log, the printing job history of up to 40 docu-ments can be displayed.

● When you select the [Details] key:The screen on the right appears.Check the detailed information, and press the [Done] key.Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again.


5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently


Checking the Device StatusYou can check the amount of paper remaining in each paper drawer, the remaining memory available, the location of a paper jam, and so on.


2 Select the [Device] key.

3 After checking the device status, press the [Done] key.


NOTE• The [Paper Jams], [Staple Loading], [Staple Jams],

[Adding Toner] or [Punch Waste] key appears below the “Recovery Steps”, depending on each status. When you press each key, the display shows how to remove the jammed paper, how to add toner, etc.

Device Sta-tus


5P

rintin

g E

ffici

ently



6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs

This chapter describes the initial settings and how to change them to suit your needs.

Additional Functions Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Settings) . . . . . . . 6-6

Selecting the Initial Function at Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Selecting the Default Display After Auto Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Setting Entry Tone, Error Tone, Job Done Tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Setting Inch Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/ Auto Drawer Switching . . . . . . . . 6-10Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12Changing the Energy Saver Mode Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14Setting the Functions Keys as keys to Reactivate the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15Setting the Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15Distinguishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16Setting a Dedicated Tray for Each Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17Setting the Printing Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19Setting a Standard Mode for Local Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

Setting the Timer (Timer Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24Setting the Current Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24Setting the Time to Initiate Auto Sleep after Finishing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26Setting the Time Taken for Display to Return to Basic Screen after Finishing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27Setting the Time Taken for the Unit to Quiet Down after Last Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28Setting the Time That the Unit’s Power Turns OFF on Different Days of the Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29Setting the Low-Power Mode Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original Image and Print Image Occur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31Staple Repositioning for Saddle Finisher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32Changing the Saddle Stitch Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33Adjusting the Standard Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34

Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Copy Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35Setting Standard Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35Setting Automatic Collate On/ Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37Setting Image Orientation Priority to On/ Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38Setting the Job Duration Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39Setting Auto Orientation to On/ Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40

6C H A P T E R

6-1

6. Setting and Adjusting Common Settings to Suit Your Needs

6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting the Photo Mode of the Copy Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-41Changing the Current Standard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-42Restoring Settings to Default Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45

Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (Mail Box Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-46Setting/ Storing the Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-46Initializing a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-49Setting the Photo Mode of the Mail Box Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-51Setting the Standard mode for Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52

Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Settings). . . . . . . . . . . .6-55Setting/ Changing the System Manager ID and Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-55Setting the Department ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-58Setting Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-72Erasing a Message Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-73Setting the Auto Offline On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-74

Printing the Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-75Printing the Contents of the Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-75

6-2


Additional Functions Settings Table

6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds

The following items can be stored or set in the Additional Functions screen. (* indicates factory default setting)

NOTE• In addition to the modes listed below, the [Printer Settings], [Network Settings], and [Remote UI On/Off]

modes are displayed when the network printer function is enabled.• For details of the following settings, refer to the instruction manual for the relevant function.

- [Printer Settings] (See the PS/PCL Reference Guide.)- [Remote UI On/Off] (See the Remote UI Guide.)- [Network Settings] (See the Network Guide.)

Initial Function

Auto Clear SettingAudible Tones

Inch EntryDrawer Eligibility ForAPS/ ADS

Store Paper Type

Energy Saver ModeFunction Key Wake UpEnergy Consumption in Sleep ModeLTRR/STMT Original Selection

Tray Designation

Printing PriorityStandard Stack Bypass Settings

Copy*/ Mail BoxSet System Monitor Screen as initial function: On/ Off*Set [Device] as the default for System Monitor : On*/ OffInitial Function*/ Selected FunctionEntry Tone/ Error Tone/ Job Done Tone(All On*/Off)On*/ OffCopy*/ Printer/ Mail Box/ Other(Stack bypass: On/ Off*, Drawers: On*/ Off)Copy: Consider Paper Type: On/ Off*Paper drawer (1, 2), Paper Deck: Plain*/ Heavy/ Recycled/ Color/ Letterhead/ Bond/ 3-Hole PunchPaper drawer (3, 4): Plain*/ Recycled/ Color/ Letterhead/ Bond/ 3-Hole Punch—10%*/ —25%/ —50%/ NoneOn/ Off*Low*/ HighDistinguish Manually/ Use LTRR Format*/ Use STMT FormatTray A: Copy*/ Printer*/ Other*Tray B: Copy*/ Printer*/ Other*1:Copy (Priority)/ 2:Printer/ 3:OtherOn/ Off*

p. 6-6

p. 6-7p. 6-8

p. 6-9p. 6-10

p. 6-12

p. 6-14p. 6-15p. 6-15p. 6-16

p. 6-17

p. 6-18p. 6-19

Common Settings

Additional Function Available settings Applicablepage

Additional Functions Settings Table 6-3

6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Paper Select: Auto*/ Select paper supplyCopies: 1* to 2,000 setsFinisher:- With the Finisher

Do not Collate/ Collate/ Offset Collate*/ Group/Offset Group/ Staple (Corner (TopLeft/ BtmLeft/ TopRight/ BtmRight), Double (Left/ Right))

- With the Finisher+Puncher Unit-B1Do not Collate/ Collate/ Offset Collate*/ Group/Offset Group/ Staple (Corner (TopLeft/ BtmLeft/ TopRight/ BtmRight), Double (Left/ Right))/Hole Punch

- With the Copy Tray-C3Do not Collate/ Collate*/ Rotate Collating/Group/ Rotate Grouping

Two-sided Print : On/ Off*Erase Document After Printing : On/ Off*Merge Documents: On/ Off*Initialize

Default setting (12-digit number)Time Zone Settings: GMT—12:00 to GMT+12:00, (GMT—5:00*)Summertime Settings: On/ Off*10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 min., 1 hour*, 90 min., 2, 3, 4 hours0 (no setting), 1 to 9 min., 2 min.*0 (no setting), 1 to 9 min., 1 min.*Sunday to Saturday, 00:00 to 23:59 inone-minute increments 10, 15*, 20, 30, 40, 50 min.,1 hour, 90 min., 2, 3, 4 hours

X/ Y: 0*, —1.0% to +1.0% in 0.1% increments Press the [Start] key.

—2.0 mm to +2.0 mm (0 mm*) in 0.25 mm increments

9 Steps, 5*Press the [Start] key.Press the [Start] key.

p. 6-21

p. 6-23

p. 6-24

p. 6-26

p. 6-27p. 6-28p. 6-29

p. 6-30

p. 6-31p. 6-32

p. 6-33

p. 6-34p. 8-30p. 8-31

Applicablepage

Common SettingsStandard Local Print Settings

Initialize Common SettingsTimer SettingsDate & Time Settings

Change Auto Sleep Time

Change Auto Clear TimeTime Until Unit Quiets DownDaily Timer Settings

Low Power ModeTime

Adjustment/CleaningZoom Fine AdjustmentSaddle Stitcher Staple RepositioningSaddle Stitch Position AdjustmentExposure RecalibrationFeeder CleaningWire Cleaning

Additional Function Available settings

Additional Functions Settings Table6-4

6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


ApplicablepageAdditional Function Available settings

All modes (No setting*)On*/ OffOn/ Off*On/ Off*On*/ OffOn/ Off*Store, InitializeInitialize

Number: 0 to 99Store Name: 24 characters max.Password: 7 digit number max.Doc. Auto Erase: 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hours, 1, 2, 3*, 7, 30 days, 0 (no limit)InitializeOn/ Off*Store, Initialize

System Manager: 32 characters max.System Manager ID: 7 digit number max.System Password: 7 digit number max.E-mail Address: 64 characters max.Contact Information: 32 characters max.Comment: 32 characters max.Department ID Management: On/ Off* (Store Dept. ID/Password, Print Totals,Accept Jobs with unknown ID: On*/ Off)Device Name: 32 charactersLocation: 32 charactersEraseOn/ Off*

Print

p. 6-35p. 6-37p. 6-38p. 6-39p. 6-40p. 6-41p. 6-42p. 6-45

p. 6-46

p. 6-51p. 6-52

p. 6-55

p. 6-58

p. 6-72

p. 6-73p. 6-74

p. 6-75

Copy SettingsStandard Key 1, 2 SettingsAuto CollateImage Orientation PriorityJob Duration DisplayAuto OrientationPhoto ModeStandard SettingsInitialize Copy SettingsMail Box SettingsBox Set/Store

Photo ModeStandard Scan SettingsSystem SettingsSystem Manager Settings

Department ID Management

Device Info Settings

Clear Message BoardAuto OfflineReport SettingsUser s Data List

Additional Functions Settings Table 6-5

6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)

NOTE• The Common Settings screen is made up of several screens. Use the [ ▼] and [▲] keys to scroll to the

desired screen and make the required settings.• When the [ ▼] or [▲] key should be pressed, the indication is displayed in this manual.

Selecting the Initial Function at Power ONYou can specify which screen to display, when you turn ON the main power. The System Monitor screen also can be specified.

NOTE• The default settings as follows:

- Select Initial Function: Copy- Set “System Monitor Screen” as initial function: Off- Set [Device] as the default for “System Monitor”: On

1 Call up the desired screen as follows:

2 Select the [Copy] or [Mail Box] key, and press the [OK] key.

● When you select the [Copy] key:The Copy Basic Features screen is displayed when the main power is turned ON, or after Auto Clear.

● When you select the [Mail Box] key:The Mail Box selection screen is displayed when the main power is turned ON, or after Auto Clear.

● When using the System Monitor screen as initial screen:Select the [On] key, and press the [OK] key. The System Monitor screen is displayd when the main power is turned ON, or after Auto Clear.

NOTE• When you do not want to set the Device window as

a default window in the System Monitor screen, press the [Off] key and press the [OK] key. When you select the [Off] key, the Copy window is set as the default window.

Common Settings Initial Function keyAdditional Functions

Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Settings)6-6

6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds



Repeat this until the Basic Features screen appears again.

Selecting the Default Display After Auto ClearGives you the choice of whether or not to display the screen set by this function after Auto Clear has taken place.

NOTE• The time delay for Auto Clear can be set. (See “Setting the Time Taken for Display to Return to Basic

Screen after Finishing Operations,” on p. 6-27.)• The default setting is “Initial Function”.


2 Select the [Initial Function] or [Selected Func-tion] key, and press the [OK] key.

● When you select the [Initial Function] key:The screen set under Initial Function is dis-played after Auto Clear has taken place. For example, if Copy is set under Initial Function and Auto Clear takes place after setting the Mail Box function, the display returns to the Copy Basic Features screen.

● When you select the [Selected Function] key:The display returns to the screen that was dis-played before Auto Clear takes place. For example, even if Copy is set under Initial Func-tion and Auto Clear takes place after setting the Mail Box function, the display returns to the Mail Box selection screen.



Auto Clear Setting keyAdditional Functions

Setting Specifications that are Common to Each Function (Common Settings) 6-7

6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting Entry Tone, Error Tone, Job Done ToneGives you the choice of whether or not to sound audible tones. The following tones sound at the following times:

Entry Tone : When pressing keys on the control panel or keys in the touch panel displayError Tone : When a malfunction occurs (e.g. paper jam or operational error)Job Done Tone : After the last copy has been made (e.g. outputting or stapling is completed)

NOTE• The default setting is “On” for all tones.


2 Select the [On] or [Off] keys for “Entry Tone”, “Error Tone” and “Job Done Tone”, and press the [OK] key.



Audible Tones keyAdditional Functions


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting Inch InputYou can display the keys for entering values in inches in the numeric entry screen.

NOTE• The default setting is “On”.


2 Select the [On] or [Off] key, and press the [OK] key.



Inch Entry keyAdditional Functions


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/ Auto Drawer SwitchingThe paper drawers to be used for Automatic Paper Selection and Auto Drawer Switching can be set. This setting can be made independently for Copy, Mail Box, and other functions. It is useful when different paper drawers are to be used for different purposes.

NOTE• Paper drawers set to On are used for the following functions:

- Auto Paper Selection (APS) : The machine automatically selects the appropriate paper size (paper drawer) for the size of the original and the set ratio.

- Auto Drawer Switching (ADS) : If a paper drawer runs out of paper during a continuous printing job, the machine automatically selects another paper drawer with the same paper size and begins feeding paper from that paper drawer.

• The default settings are “Off” for the stack bypass and “On” for the paper drawers (1 to 4).


2 Select the [Copy], [Mail Box], [Printer] or [Other] key.

NOTE• You can select the [Printer] and [Other] keys only

when the network printer function is enabled.• The [Other] key is pressed when setting the paper

drawers to be reported with the report printing.

Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS keyAdditional Functions


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


3 Select the [On] or [Off] key for the stack bypass and each paper drawer, and press the [OK] key.

● When you select the [On] key:Makes the paper drawer eligible for APS/ ADS.

● When you select the [Off] key:Makes the paper drawer ineligible for APS/ ADS.

NOTE• When you select the [Copy] key, you can select

whether or not to set priority to paper type.• If you set the [Consider Paper Type] key to On,

paper will not be fed even when paper runs out during printing, unless other loaded papers suit the size and stored type. For details of stored paper types, see “Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Drawer,” on p. 6-12.

• If you set the [Consider Paper Type] key to Off, paper will be fed from another paper drawer when paper runs out during printing, if the same paper size is loaded in that paper drawer.

• When you select the [Printer] key, the Stack bypass icon is not displayed.

• The number of each paper drawer indicates the fol-lowing places.



Paper Drawer 1

Paper Drawer 2

Stack bypass

Paper Drawer 3Paper Drawer 4

Paper Deck (option)

When you select the [Copy] key.


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper DrawerYou can store the paper type loaded to each paper drawer.


2 Select the paper drawer for which you want to store the paper type.

3 Select the paper type loaded in the paper drawer, and press the [OK] key.

NOTE• Load the same type of paper as set in each paper

drawer.• For details of paper types, see “Available Paper

Stock,” on p. 1-17.• The number of each paper drawer indicates the fol-

lowing places.

Store Paper Type keyAdditional Functions

Paper Drawer 1

Paper Drawer 2Paper Drawer 3Paper Drawer 4

Paper Deck (option)


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds




NOTE• The paper types stored here are displayed when

selecting paper in each mode, as shown on the right.


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Changing the Energy Saver Mode SettingYou can change the Energy Saver mode that reduces the power consumed by the machine.

NOTE• The default setting is “–10%”.


2 Select the [-10%], [-25%], [-50%] or [None] key, and press the [OK] key.

NOTE• The approximate energy savings figures for each

mode and the approximate delay times from power ON to ready to print status are listed below.- –10% mode : 10% less power (approx. 50 sec.)*- –25% mode : 25% less power (approx. 90 sec.)*- –50% mode : 50% less power (approx. 180 sec.)*- None : 2% less power (approx. 0 sec.)*

* The figures in parenthesis ( ) show the approxi-mate time it takes for the machine to return to the ready to print status.



Energy Saver Mode keyAdditional Functions


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting the Functions Keys as keys to Reactivate the MachineYou can set the , , and keys as the keys to reactivate the machine from the Energy Saver mode.

NOTE• The default setting is “Off”.





Setting the Energy Consumption in the Sleep ModeYou can set the amount of energy consumption when the machine is in the Sleep mode.

NOTE• In the following cases, the energy consumption when the machine enters the Sleep mode will be “High”

regardless of this setting. For details such as setting each function, see the Network Guide or the Printer Guide.- [Function Key Wake Up]:ON- [TCP/IP Settings] → [IP Address] → [DHCP]:ON- [NetWare Settings]:ON- [AppleTalk Settings]:ON

• The default setting is “Low”.


COPY MAIL BOX SCAN

Function Key Wake Up keyAdditional Functions

Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode keyAdditional Functions


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


2 Select the [Low] or [High] key, and press the [OK] key.



Distinguishing LTRR-Size and STMT-Size OriginalsWhen scanning LTRR size or STMT size originals set on the platen glass, you can make a setting to either distinguish the original sizes manually, or to scan originals of only one of these sizes.

NOTE• The default setting is “Use LTRR Format”.


2 Select the [Distinguish Manually], [Use LTRR Format] or [Use STMT Format] key, and press the [OK] key.

● When you select the [Distinguish Manually] key:If you place LTRR or STMT-size original on the platen glass, a display to select the original size appears when scanning.

● When you select the [Use LTRR Format] key:If you place LTRR or STMT-size original on the platen glass, the machine detects it as LTRR-size original.

● When you select the [Use STMT Format] key:If you place LTRR or STMT-size original on the platen glass, the machine detects it as STMT-size original.

LTRR/ STMT Original Selection keyAdditional Functions


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds




Setting a Dedicated Tray for Each FunctionYou can select the function for which each output tray of the Finisher-F1 (option) or the Saddle Finisher-F2 (option) is to be used.

IMPORTANT• This function cannot be set when the Finisher-F1 or the Saddle Finisher-F2 is not attached.

NOTE• The default settings are as follows:

- Tray A: Copy, Printer, Other - Tray B: Copy, Printer, Other• It is possible to assign a single tray to multiple functions.• We recommend attaching the supplied labels to the trays for identifying their respective use.

Blank labels are also provided which you can fill out yourself.


2 Select the functions of dedicated output trays A and B, and press the [OK] key.

NOTE• You can select the [Printer] key only when the net-

work printer function is enabled.• Prints of the Mail Box and Report are output as

“Other”.• When the paper reaches the stacking limit of the

tray while both trays are set as the designated tray for a certain function, the machine automatically changes the output tray to other available tray.

• When you want to set a tray as the designated tray for only a certain function, select only that function.



Tray Designation keyAdditional Functions


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting the Printing PriorityYou can set the printing priority. A job that is set to a high priority is printed preferentially after the job currently being performed.


- Copy: 1 (Priority) • Printer: 2 • Other: 3 (1, 2 and 3 indicate priority sequence.)• Priority printing will not take place even when you set the highest priority until the current job is completed.

However, if the current job is paused, printing of the job from a function with higher priority may be started depending on the settings set.


2 Select the printing priority, and press the [OK] key.

Setting [1] sets the highest printing priority.

NOTE• You can select the [Printer] key only when the net-

work printer function is enabled.• Prints of the Mail Box and Report are output as

“Others”.• When the same printing priority has been set for

multiple functions, printing starts from whichever of the functions is set to print first.



Printing Priority keyAdditional Functions


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting the Standard Paper for the Stack bypassStores the default settings for the StackBypass Setting. By pressing the [Stack Bypass] key when making reserved prints, you can reserve by the mode that you stored here.

NOTE• The default setting is “Off”.• When using the stack bypass as a paper source for the Copy and Mail Box functions, you must select the

stack bypass as the Auto Paper Drawer Selection.


2 Select the [On] or [Off] key.

NOTE• When you select the [On] key, the mode returns to

the stored standard paper mode when you press the key or after Auto Clear has taken place.

● When you select the [Off] key:Proceed to step 3.

● When you select the [On] key:Press the [Store] key.

Select the paper size, and press the [Next] key.


size] key.

Standard Stack Bypass Settings keyAdditional Functions

Reset


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Select the paper type, and press the [OK] key.





6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting a Standard Mode for Local PrintingThe machine prints documents with the standard Local Print settings set here when printing documents in the Mail Box without changing the settings set when documents were scanned, or when printing documents sent from a personal computer after pressing the [Change P Settings] key. It also prints with the standard Local Print settings when you merge documents.

• Paper Select (Paper source)• Copies• Finisher

-With the FinisherDo not Collate/ Collate/ Offset Collate*/ Group/ Offset Group/ Staple (Corner (TopLeft/ BtmLeft/ TopRight/ BtmRight), Double (Left/ Right))

-With the Finisher+Puncher Unit-B1Do not Collate/ Collate/ Offset Collate*/ Group/ Offset Group/ Staple (Corner (TopLeft/ BtmLeft/ TopRight/ BtmRight), Double (Left/ Right))/ Hole Punch

-With the Copy Tray-C3Do not Collate/ Collate*/ Rotate Collate/ Group/ Rotate Group

• Two-sided Print (On/ Off) • Erase Document After Printing (On/ Off) • Merge Documents (On/ Off)


- Paper Select : Auto- Copies : 1- Finisher : Offset Collate (With the Finisher)- Two-sided Print : Off- Erase Document After Printing : Off- Merge Documents : Off


Standard Local Print Settings keyAdditional Functions


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


2 Set each mode.

● Paper SelectSelect the paper source.

● CopiesSet the number of copies from 1 set to 2000 sets.

● FinisherSet the type of collating.

● Two-sided PrintSet whether or not to perform two-sided print-ing.

● Erase Document After PrintingSet whether or not to erase the document after printing.

● Merge DocumentsSet whether or not to merge documents when you select multiple documents.

3 Once you have completed all settings, press the [Done] key.




6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Returning the Common Settings to Their DefaultsThis function allows you to return the common settings to their defaults (initial settings).


2 Select the [Yes] key.

NOTE• To cancel initialization, select the [No] key.

This screen is displayed for about two seconds.



Initialize Common SettingsAdditional Functions key


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting the Timer (Timer Settings)
NOTE
• The Timer Settings screen is made up of several screens. Use the [ ▼] and [▲] keys to scroll to the desired screen and make the required settings.

• When the [ ▼] or [▲] key should be pressed, the indication is displayed in this manual.

Setting the Current Date and TimeSets the current date and time. The date and time set here is also used as the time setting required for functions for which the time can be set.


2 Enter the current date (year, month, day) and time with the Numeric keys ( - ), and press the [OK] key.

NOTE• Enter the date as four digits without a space.

- Example: March 25 → 0325• Enter all the four digits for the year.• Enter the time in 24-hour notation as four digits

without a space.- Example: 7:05 a.m. → 0705

11:18 p.m. → 2318• If you make a mistake when entering values, press

the key, and enter the values again starting with the year.

● When setting the Time Zone Settings:Press the [Time Zone Settings] key, then select the time zone where the machine is located. Then press the [OK] key.

NOTE• Press the [ ▼] or [▲] key to scroll the list.•The default setting is “GMT–5:00”.

Central time (US Canada) :GMT–5:00Eastern time (US Canada) :GMT–6:00Mountain time (US Canada) :GMT–7:00Pacific time (US Canada) :GMT–8:00

Timer Settings Date & Time Settings keyAdditional Functions

0 9

CClear

Setting the Timer (Timer Settings)6-24

6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


● When setting the Daylight Saving Time Settings:Press the [Daylight Saving Time Setting] key, then press the [ON] key.

Press both the [Start Date] and [End Date] keys to set the time.

Set the month, week, day, time to start and end the Daylight Saving Time settings, and press the [OK] key.

NOTE• You can set the time from 0-23, in 1 hour incre-

ments.• The default setting is “Off”.• When you set the Daylight Saving Time, the

machine automatically sets the standard time of the machine one-hour forward.



Setting the Timer (Timer Settings) 6-25

6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting the Time to Initiate Auto Sleep after Finishing Opera-tionsIf the machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a certain period of time, the control panel power switch automatically switches OFF to save power. The machine then enters the Sleep mode.

NOTE• The default setting is “1 hour”.


2 Enter the desired Auto Sleep Time with the [▼] or [▲] key, and press the [OK] key.

The Auto Sleep Time settings are 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 minutes, 1 hour, 90 minutes and 2 to 4 hours (in one-hour increments).



keyAdditional FunctionsChange Auto Sleep Time


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting the Time Taken for Display to Return to Basic Screen after Finishing OperationsIf the machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a certain period of time, the display returns to the Basic screen (Standard setting) of the selected function.This time is called “Auto Clear Time”. Auto Clear Time can be set from 1 to 9 minutes in one-minute increments. Auto Clear Time can also be set to “Off”.

NOTE• The default setting is “2 minutes”.• When “0” is set, Auto Clear function is not set.


2 Enter the desired time period with the Numeric keys ( - ) or [–] and [+] keys, and press the [OK] key.

The Auto Clear Time settings are from 0 to 9 minutes (in one-minute increments).



Change Auto Clear Time keyAdditional Functions

0 9


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting the Time Taken for the Unit to Quiet Down after Last Task This machine enters the Quiet mode after a specified amount of time has elapsed following a print job or after a key has been pressed. On this screen you can specify the amount of time that must elapse prior to entering the Quiet mode.

NOTE• The default setting is “1 minute”.• When “0” is set, the Quiet mode is not set.


2 Enter the desired time period with the Numeric keys ( - ) or [–] and [+] keys, and press the [OK] key.

The Quiet mode settings are from 0 to 9 minutes (in one-minute increments).



Time Until Unit Quiets Down keyAdditional Functions

0 9


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting the Time That the Unit’s Power Turns OFF on Differ-ent Days of the WeekYou can set the time that the machine is automatically turned OFF for each day of the week.• Setting range: Daily from Sunday to Saturday, 00:00 to 23:59 in one-minute increments

NOTE• The default setting is “no setting”.• When Auto Clear Time and Daily Timer are both set, Auto Clear Time has priority.


2 Select the day of the week, enter the time with the Numeric keys ( - ), and press the [OK] key.

NOTE• Enter the time in 24-hour notation as four digits

without a space.- Example: 7:05 a.m. → 0705

11:18 p.m. → 2318• If you make a mistake when entering the time,

choose the day of the week again, then enter a four-digit number.

• If you do not want to specify the time, press the key.



Daily Timer Settings keyAdditional Functions

0 9

CClear


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting the Low-Power Mode TimeIf the machine is not operated (no keys are pressed) for a certain period of time after prints have been made or a key operation performed, the machine automatically enters the Low-Power mode. You can easily change the time for the machine to enter the Low-Power mode.

NOTE• The default setting is “15 minutes”.


2 Select the Low-Power Mode Time by pressing the [▼] or [▲] key, and press the [OK] key.

The Low-Power Mode Time settings are 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 minutes, 1 hour, 90 minutes and 2 to 4 hours (in one-hour increments).



Low-Power Mode Time keyAdditional Functions



Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning)

6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds

NOTE• The Adjustment/Cleaning screen is made up of several screens. Use the [ ▼] and [▲] keys to scroll to the


Fine-adjusting Zoom When Differences in Original Image and Print Image OccurWhen you print a copy or a document in a box, if a slight difference occurs between the size of the original image and the size of the print image, you can perform fine adjustment so as to reduce this error.


2 Press the [–] or [+] key to adjust the percent-age (%), and press the [OK] key.

The adjustment range for both the X (left-right direction) and the Y (up-down direction) is from –1.0 % to +1.0 % in 0.1 % increments.



Adjustment/Cleaning

Zoom Fine Adjustment keyAdditional Functions

Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning) 6-31

6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Staple Repositioning for Saddle FinisherAfter a staple jam in the Saddle Finisher Unit has been cleared or staples are loaded in the Saddle Finisher, this function feeds paper to the unit and staples a few times, so that staples will be immediately available for the next job.

IMPORTANT• This function cannot be set when the Saddle Finisher-F2 is not attached.

NOTE• The required paper is fed automatically.• The following paper sizes can be used for this function: 11"x17"/ LTRR.



NOTE• To cancel the staple repositioning, press the [Can-

cel] key.



Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning keyAdditional Functions

Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning)6-32

6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Changing the Saddle Stitch PositionWhen the Saddle Finisher-F2 is attached, slight position differences in the saddle stitch position may occur. You can compensate for such differences.

IMPORTANT• This function cannot be set when the Saddle Finisher-F2 is not attached.


2 Select the paper size for which you want to change the saddle stitch position.

NOTE• Some of the paper sizes displayed may not be

available in certain countries.

3 Use the [▼] and [▲] keys to adjust the saddle stitch position, and press the [OK] key.

The setting range is from –2.0 mm to +2.0 mm, in 0.25 mm increments.



Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment keyAdditional Functions

The example shows adjustment for11"x17"-size paper.

Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning) 6-33

6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Adjusting the Standard ExposureAdjusts the exposure adjustment scale to calibrate differences in exposure. Perform this adjustment if differences between the image in the original and the print occur when printing an original free from smudges or dirty marks with the exposure scale set in the middle.

NOTE• The default setting is “5”.


2 Press the [Light] or [Dark] keys to adjust the exposure, and press the [OK] key.



keyAdditional Functions

Adjusting the Machine (Adjustment/Cleaning)6-34


Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Copy Settings)

6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds

NOTE• The Copy Settings screen is made up of several screens. Use the [ ▼] and [▲] keys to scroll to the


Setting Standard KeysYou can store up to two Standard keys from the Copy Ratio, Finisher and Two-sided Mode keys on the Basic Features screen, the keys in the Special Features screen, or the memory keys containing copy jobs stored in the Mode Memory.


2 Press the [▼] or [▲] key and press the group of the function that you want to store as your favorite key.

3 Select the desired mode to be stored as a Standard key, and press the [OK] key.

Standard Key Settings keyAdditional Functions

Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Copy Settings) 6-35

6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds




Example: Standard keys 1 and 2 are displayed in the touch panel display as shown on the right.

Selected mode

Standard key 1Standard key 2

Setting Specifications of the Copy Function (Copy Settings)6-36

6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting Automatic Collate On/ OffThis function allows automatic selection of the Collate (Offset Collate) mode when the original is placed in the feeder. This is helpful when making multiple copies, because the user does not need to remember to select the Finisher mode.

NOTE• When Auto Collate is set to “On” with the Finisher (option) attached, the Offset Collate mode will be set.

Without any output option attached, the Collate mode will be set.• The default setting is “On”.





Copy Settings Auto Collate keyAdditional Functions


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting Image Orientation Priority to On/ OffThe orientation of the image may be printed conversely depending on the copy mode set. You can set whether or not to copy the image in the same direction as the original.

NOTE• The default setting is “Off”.• When the Image Orientation Priority is “On”, the first copy time will take longer.





Image Orientation Priority keyAdditional Functions


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting the Job Duration DisplayWhen the Job Duration Display is set to “On”, the time remaining until completion of the copy job (Job Duration Time) is indicated in minutes in the touch panel display. (The job duration time is not displayed for some copy modes.)

NOTE• The default setting is “Off”.• The job duration time is not displayed for the Transparency Interleaving, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Different

Size Originals, Rotate Collating, and Rotate Grouping modes or when the copy waiting time is less than one minute.





Job Duration Display keyAdditional Functions


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting Auto Orientation to On/ OffUsing parameters such as original size and zoom ratio, this function automatically rotates the image to the most suitable position for the set paper size.

NOTE• The default setting is “On”.



NOTE• Only standard size originals up to LTR (for direct

zoom ratio) can be rotated.• The Auto Orientation will not be performed when

you set Enlarging.• When Automatic Paper Selection is selected, the

paper matching the width will be displayed as the optimum size if there is no paper with the optimum length.



Auto Orientation keyAdditional Functions


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting the Photo Mode of the Copy FunctionYou can set whether or not to use the Photo mode in the Copy function. When the Photo Mode is “On”, you can select the [Printed Img.] and [Photo] keys when making copies with the image quality setting.






Photo Mode keyAdditional Functions


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Changing the Current Standard SettingsStandard Settings refers to a combination of copy modes that the machine is set to after the power is turned ON or when the key is pressed.This section describes how to store the currently set copy settings as the Standard Settings. Standard Settings can also be returned to their default settings.


- Copy quantity: 1- Paper selection: Automatic Paper Selection- Exposure/ Image quality: A- Copy Ratio: Direct (100%)- Copy function: 1→1-sided copy

■ Storing the Standard Settings for CopyingNOTE

• To change the Standard Settings, Copy settings must already have been stored as the Standard Settings beforehand. (See “Flow of Copy Operations,” on p. 2-3.)



Reset

Standard Settings keyAdditional Functions


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds



The settings currently displayed are stored as the Standard Settings.

NOTE• The settings displayed here are the currently set

copy settings. Press the [ ▼] or [▲] key to display copy modes that do not fit in the display area.

• To cancel storing the currently displayed settings as the Standard Settings, press the [No] key. The display returns to the screen in step 2.




■ Initializing the Standard Settings


2 Press the [Initialize] key.



6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


3 Check the setting, and press the [Yes] key.

The Standard Settings are initialized.

NOTE• To cancel the initialization, press the [No] key. The

display returns to the screen in step 2.





6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Restoring Settings to Default Copy SettingsItems that have been changed in the Copy Settings can be returned to their default settings.



Proceed to step 3.

NOTE• To cancel the initialization of copy settings, press

the [No] key. The display returns to Copy Setting screen.




Initialize Copy Settings keyAdditional Functions


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (Mail Box Settings)

Setting/ Storing the BoxWhen using the box, you can set and store each box item beforehand.

NOTE• A box can store up to 100 items (Box number: 00 to 99).


2 Press the desired box number.

NOTE• When entering the box number using the Numeric


3 Enter the password, and press the [OK] key.

NOTE• Enter the password stored under Box Set/Store

setting. This step is not required when setting the box for the first time or if a password is not stored.

Mail Box Settings Box Set/ Store keyAdditional Functions

0 9

Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (Mail Box Settings)6-46

6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds



5 Enter the box name, and press the [OK] key.




• To cancel storing, press the [Cancel] key.

6 Enter the password with the Numeric keys ( - ).

IMPORTANT• Since there is no way to check the password

stored, please record the password you stored and keep it separately.

NOTE• If no password is stored, proceed to step 7.• You can delete the number you entered by pressing

the key.• To cancel storing, press the [Cancel] key.

7 Set the amount of time to elapse before received documents are automatically deleted by pressing the [▼] or [▲] key, and press the [OK] key.

NOTE• The default setting is “3 days”.

?

Start

Clear

Reset

Guide


Interrupt

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0ID

9

C

0 9

CClear

Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (Mail Box Settings) 6-47

6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds






6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Initializing a BoxIMPORTANT

• You cannot initialize a box if there is data remaining in it.


2 Select the box that you want to initialize.

NOTE• When entering the box number using the Numeric


3 Enter the password, and press the [OK] key.


(See “Setting/ Storing the Box,” on p. 6-46.) If a password is not stored, this operation is not required.

4 Press the [Initialize] key.


0 9


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds



The box is initialized.

NOTE• To cancel the initialization, press the [No] key.





6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting the Photo Mode of the Mail Box FunctionYou can select whether or not to use the Photo Mode in the Mail Box Function. When the Photo Mode is “On”, you can select the [Printed Img.] and [Photo] keys when scanning documents with the image quality setting.








6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting the Standard mode for ScanningYou can change the standard mode for when scanning originals into a box. You can also return the standard mode settings to their defaults.


- Document Size: Auto- Record Size: Auto- Exposure/ Image quality: A

■ Storing the Standard Settings for ScanningNOTE

• To change the Standard Settings, Scan settings must already have been stored as the Standard Settings beforehand. (See “Storing Originals in the Box,” on p. 4-3.)




The settings currently displayed are stored.

NOTE• The settings displayed here are the currently set

scan settings. Press the [ ▼] or [▲] key to display the scan modes that do not fit in the display area.

• To cancel storing the currently displayed settings as the Standard Settings, press the [No] key. The display returns to the screen in step 2.

Standard Scan Settings keyAdditional Functions


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds





■ Initializing the Standard mode for Scanning


2 Select the [Initialize] key.

3 Check the settings, and press the [Yes] key.

The Standard Settings are initialized.

NOTE• To cancel the initialization, press the [No] key. The

display returns to the screen in step 2.



6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds







Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Settings)

6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds

Setting/ Changing the System Manager ID and PasswordYou can set a password for the system manager. If the System Manager ID/ Password is set, restrictions can be placed on storing or changing the System Settings.

IMPORTANT• When the Card Reader-C1 is attached, the System Manager ID and the System Password already stored,

will be erased.

NOTE• When the Card Reader-C1 is attached, you cannot store the numbers from 1 to 1000 as the Sys-

tem Manager ID.• For details on how to enter the characters, see “Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display,” on p.

10-6.• The maximum number of characters you can assign for a name, contact, and comment is 32, and

for a E-mail address is 64.• The maximum number of numbers you can store for the System Manager ID and Password is seven. If

you store them with less than seven digits, the machine stores them as follows:- Example: When “321” is entered → “0000321” is stored


NOTE• When the System Manager ID/ Password is set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password

after pressing the [System Settings] key. Then, press the key.

2 Press the [System Manager] key, then enter the name of the system manager.

NOTE• To cancel storing, press the [Cancel] key.

System Settings System ManagerSettings keyAdditional Functions

ID

Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Settings) 6-55

6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


3 Press the [System Manager ID] key, and enter the number within seven digits with the Numeric keys ( - ) as the new System Manager ID.

NOTE• You cannot store a System Manager ID with only

the number “0”, such as “0000000”.• You must set the System Manager ID.• You can delete the number you entered by pressing


4 Press the [System Password] key, and enter the number within seven digits with the Numeric keys ( - ) as the new System Password. Then press the [Next] key.

NOTE• You cannot store a System Password with only the

number “0”, such as “0000000”.• Press the [Next] key when not setting the System

Password.• To erase the entered character (number), press


5 Press the [E-mail Address] key, then enter e-mail address of the system manager.

6 Press the [Contact Information] key, then enter where to contact the system manager.

0 9

CClear

0 9

CClear

Setting Specifications of the System Management ID (System Settings)6-56

6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


7 Press the [Comment] key, then enter a com-ment for the system manager.

8 Once you have completed all settings, press the [OK] key.




6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting the Department ID ManagementBy storing a Department ID and Password for each department, you can set the machine so that its functions can be used only after the correct password has been entered.This is called “Department ID Management”. Department IDs and Passwords for up to 1000 departments can be stored. This function allows you to check the print totals for each department for management purposes. With Department ID Management, the following operations can be performed:• Setting whether or not to set Department ID Management• Storing the Department ID and the Password

IMPORTANT• This function will switch to Card ID Management when the Card Reader-C1 (option) is attached, and will

automatically manage the Department ID. • When the Card Reader-C1 is attached, you do not need to store a password, but you can change the

password.

NOTE• The default setting is “Off”.• The maximum number of numbers you can store for the Department ID and Password is seven. If you

store them with less than seven digits, the machine stores them as follows:- Example: When “321” is entered → “0000321” is stored

■ Storing the Department ID, Password and Impression Limit




2 Select whether to use the Department ID Man-agement function.

● When you select the [Off] key:Press the [OK] key, then press the [Done] key.The display returns to the Additional Functions screen.

● When you select [On] key:To store the Department ID and Password, press the [Store Dept. ID/ Password] key and proceed to step 3.

keyAdditional Functions DepartmentID Manage-

ID


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds



4 Press the [Department ID] key and enter the Department ID with the Numeric keys ( -

).

NOTE• You cannot store a Department ID with only the

number “0”, such as “0000000”.

5 Press the [Password] key and enter the pass-word with the Numeric keys ( - ).

NOTE• You cannot store a Password with only the number

“0”, such as “0000000”.• When a password is not stored, you can use this

machine by entering only the Department ID.

6 Press the [Impression Limit] key and enter the impression limit with the Numeric keys ( -

).

NOTE• Impression limits can be set from 0 to 999,999.

Printing pages in excess of this limit is not permit-ted.

• Impression limits apply to the number of printed sides. Printing one sheet of paper on two sides is counted as two impressions.

0

9

0 9

0

9


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds



8 After setting the printing restrictions, and press the [Done] key.

NOTE• To apply printing restrictions, press the [Limit

Impress.] key. The impression limits set in step 6 are enabled.

• To set the print restrictions, the Impression Limit needs to be specified in step 6.

• It is not possible to enable and disable Limit Impressions for individual departments.


NOTE• When you select the [On] key, Department ID Man-

agement is enabled. (See “Entering the Depart-ment ID and Password,” on p. 10-4.)


Repeat this until the screen on the right appears. For details on how to enter the Department ID and Password, see “Entering the Department ID and Password,” on p. 10-4.


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


■ Changing the Password and Impression Limit



after pressing the [System Settings] key. Then, press the key.• Set the Control Card when the Card Reader-C1 (option) is attached before proceeding to step 1. (See

“Inserting the Control Card,” on p. 10-2.)

2 Press the [On] key, and press the [Store Dept. ID/Password] key.

NOTE• You do not need to operate the [On] [Off] key when

the Card Reader-C1 is attached.

Press the [Store Dept. ID/ Password] key when the Card Reader-C1 is attached.

3 Use the [▼] and [▲] keys to display the Pass-word you want to change. Then select the Password, and press the [Edit] key.


ID


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


\4 Press the [Password] key and enter the Pass-word with the Numeric keys ( - ).

NOTE• You cannot store a password with only the number

“0”, such as “0000000”.

5 Press the [Impression Limit] key and enter the impression limit with the Numeric keys ( -

). Then press the [OK] key.


When the Card Reader-C1(option) is attached, you can display the number of restricted sides on the basic features screen by pressing “Display Imp. Limit”.

0 9

0

9


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds







■ Erasing the Department ID and PasswordIMPORTANT

• You cannot erase the Department ID when the Card Reader-C1 is attached.




2 Press the [On] key, and press the [Store Dept. ID/ Password] key.


ID


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


3 Use the [▼] and [▲] keys to display the Depart-ment you want to erase. Then select the Department, and press the [Erase] key.


The Department ID and Password are erased.

NOTE• To cancel erasing, press the [No] key.






6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds




■ Checking and Printing Counter InformationYou can display and also print a list of the count of the paper that was used by each department.





2 Select the [On] key, and press the [Print Totals] key.



Press the [Print Totals] key when the Card Reader-C1 is attached.


ID


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


3 Check or print the count of print totals.

The print total with the Department ID left blank (not displayed) is the total of prints from the driver not correspondent with a stored Department ID (unknown ID).

● When only checking the counter:Press the [▼] or [▲] key to display the desired Department, and check the print totals.

● When printing the displayed list:Press the [Print List] key.

The screen shown at right appears. Press the [Yes] key.

NOTE• If you do not want to print, press the [No] key.

The screen on the right appears during printing.

NOTE• To cancel printing, press the [Cancel] key.• To close the screen, press the [Done] key.


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds









6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


■ Erasing Print TotalsThe following instructions describe how to delete the print totals made so far for all departments.





2 Select the [On] key, and press the [Print Totals] key.



Press the [Print Totals] key when the Card Reader-C1 is attached.

3 When Calling Your Service Representative.


ID


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


● When Erasing by DepartmentSelect the Department you want to erase, then press the [Clear] key.

● When Erasing All CountsPress the [Clear All Totals] key.

4 Select the [Yes] key.

NOTE• If you do not want to erase the counter, press the

[No] key.

The message “Erased.” is displayed in the touch panel display for about two seconds.


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds









6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


■ Selecting whether or not to Accept Print Jobs of Unknown IDYou can set whether or not to print documents from a driver not correspondent with a stored Department ID.

NOTE• The [Accept jobs with unknown ID] key is only displayed when the network printer function is enabled.• The default setting is “On”.





2 Select the [On] key.



• You do not need to operate the [On] [Off] key when the Card Reader-C1 is attached.


● When you select the [On] key:Accepts print job from an unknown ID.

● When you select the [Off] key:Does not accept print job from an unknown ID.


ID


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds




Setting Device InformationYou can set the name of this machine and the place where it is located.




2 Press the [Device Name] and [Location] keys, then enter the name of this machine and the location where this machine is placed. Then press the [OK] key.



• The maximum number of character which can be entered is 32.

• To cancel storing, press the [Cancel] key.



keyAdditional Functions Device Informa-tion Settings

ID


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Erasing a Message BoardA message board is used to display messages for the users of this machine. The messages are sent from the system manager using the utility software. You can erase a message displayed in the message board.

NOTE• The message board is only displayed when the network printer function is enabled.




2 Select the [Yes] or [No] key.

● When you select the [Yes] key:The message is not displayed.

● When you select the [No] key:The message remains displayed.




ID


6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Setting the Auto Offline On/OffWhen the network is online, scanning is not possible with the Copy or Mail Box functions. By setting Auto Offline is to "ON", the machine will automatically go Offline.

NOTE• Auto Offline is only displayed when the Network Scan function is enabled.• The default setting is "Off".





NOTE• If Auto Offline is set to “ON”, the machine automati-

cally goes offline with time set by Auto Clear. If Auto Clear Time is set to “None” (0), the machine will go Offline after approximately 2 minutes.




ID



Printing the Report

6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds

Printing the Contents of the Network SettingsNOTE

• For details of the contents of the User’s Data List, see the Network Guide.• You can print the contents only when the network printer function is enabled.



NOTE• When you do not want to print, press the [No] key.

The screen on the right appears during the report printing.

NOTE• To cancel the report print, press the [Cancel] key.• To close the screen, press the [Done] key.



Report Settings User’s Data List keyAdditional Functions

Printing the Report 6-75

6S

ettin

g an

d A

djus

ting

Com

mon

Set

tings

to S

uit Y

our

Nee

ds


Printing the Report6-76

7Lo

adin

g P

aper

and

Add

ing

Tone

r


Loading Paper and Adding Toner

This chapter describes how to load paper and add toner.

Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Loading Paper in the Paper Drawers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Adding Toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Consumables and Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

7C H A P T E R

7-1

7Lo

adin

g P

aper

and

Add

ing

Tone

r


Loading Paper
This section describes how to load paper in the paper drawers.
IMPORTANT• When setting STMT-size paper, place it horizontally (STMTR).

NOTE• The following size paper can be loaded in the paper drawers:

- Paper drawer 1, 2 : LTR- Paper drawer 3, 4 : 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR

• For details of available paper stock which can be loaded in the paper drawers, see “Available Paper Stock,” on p. 1-17.

Loading Paper in the Paper DrawersWhen the selected paper has run out, or the selected paper drawer runs out of paper during printing, the display prompting you to load paper appears.

CAUTION• When loading paper, take care not to cut your

hands on the edges of the paper.

IMPORTANT• The message will also appear if the selected paper

drawer is not fully inserted into the machine. Prop-erly insert the paper drawer.

NOTE• You can check the amount of paper remaining in

the paper drawer by looking at the remaining paper quantity display on the front of the paper drawer.

• If the above message appears during printing, the remaining prints will automatically be made after you load paper. When you select other feeding position, the remaining prints will be made after you press the [OK] key.

• To cancel printing, press the [Cancel] key.

7-2 Loading Paper

7Lo

adin

g P

aper

and

Add

ing

Tone

r


1 Press, then release the paper drawer release button of the paper drawer in which you want to load paper.

2 Grip the handle and pull out the paper drawer until it stops.

NOTE• If the drawer seems to be stuck halfway, do not pull

it out by force. Push it back into the copier, and then try pressing the release button and pulling it out again.

Loading Paper and Adding Toner 7-3

7Lo

adin

g P

aper

and

Add

ing

Tone

r


3 Open a package of paper, and remove the paper stack.

IMPORTANT• Rewrap any remaining paper in its original pack-

age, and store it in a dry place away from direct sunlight.

• Do not copy on the following types of paper stock. Doing so may cause a paper jam.- Severely curled or wrinkled paper.- Transparencies.- Paper on which color images have been copied.- Paper which has been copied on using a digital

full color copier (do not copy on the reverse side either).

- Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (do not copy on the reverse side either).

NOTE• Paper drawers 1 and 2 hold up to about 1,500 sheets of paper each (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)).• Paper drawers 3 and 4 hold up to about 550 sheets of paper each (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)).• For high-quality prints, we recommend using paper recommended by Canon.

4 Turn the paper stack over, and place it in the paper drawer.

Even out the edges of the paper stack. Load the paper stack against the right wall of the paper drawer.

IMPORTANT• If the paper is curled, curl it down before placing it

in the paper drawer.• Make sure that the height of the paper stack does

not exceed the limit mark at the back of the paper drawer.

• Make sure that the paper size setting in the paper drawer matches the size of paper to be loaded.

NOTE• When loading paper in the paper drawer 3 for the

first time, set the size plate of the paper loaded in the paper drawer.

• For details of print direction of papers already printed with logos or patterns, see “Relation of Original Orientation and Paper Orientation,” on p. 11-9.

7-4 Loading Paper

7Lo

adin

g P

aper

and

Add

ing

Tone

r


5 Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it clicks.

CAUTION• When returning the paper drawer to its original

position, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.

IMPORTANT• Never place paper or any other items in the open

part of the paper drawer next to the paper stack. Doing so may cause paper jams.

NOTE• When paper runs out during printing, load paper,

and follow the instructions in the touch panel dis-play. The machine automatically restarts the remaining print.


7Lo

adin

g P

aper

and

Add

ing

Tone

r


Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper SizeIf you want to load a new paper size in a paper drawer, follow the procedure described below to adjust the paper drawer guides.You can adjust the paper drawers to hold the following standard paper size: 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR.

IMPORTANT• The paper size loaded in the paper drawer 3 can be changed.• The paper sizes loaded in the paper drawer 4 can be changed by your service representative. For more

details, contact your service representative.• When setting STMT-size paper, place it horizontally (STMTR).

1 Squeeze the lever on the length guide as shown in the figure and slide the length guide to align it with the mark for the desired paper size.

When loading 11"x17"-size paper, slide the length guide all the way to the left, and drop it downward.

Adjusting a PaperDrawer

Length guide

7-6 Loading Paper

7Lo

adin

g P

aper

and

Add

ing

Tone

r


2 Squeeze the lever on the width guide as shown in the illustration. Without releasing the lever, slide the width guide to align it with the mark for the desired paper size.

IMPORTANT• If the length and width guides are not adjusted

properly for the paper size loaded in the paper drawer, then the correct paper sizes might not appear in the display. Not adjusting the guides cor-rectly might cause paper jams, dirty prints or make the inside of the machine dirty. To prevent these problems from occurring, make certain that the guides are adjusted correctly for the loaded paper size.

3 Change the paper drawer’s size plate so that it matches the new paper size that you loaded.

Width guide


7Lo

adin

g P

aper

and

Add

ing

Tone

r


Adding Toner
When there is only a small amount of toner remain-ing, the message to the right appears in the display. Prints can still be made, but at this time you should purchase new toner so that you have it on hand when it is needed.
WARNING• Never dispose of the waste toner in a fire or

incinerator. Doing so may result in an explo-sion.

NOTE• When this message appears, approximately 300

prints can still be made (LTR-size Canon Standard Chart). However, since this number may vary depending upon the original, it is recommended that the toner be added as soon as possible.

When the toner has run out and prints can no longer be made, the message describing how to add toner appears in the display. Add toner following the described procedure.

IMPORTANT• The screen prompting you to add toner is displayed

until you press the [Recover Later/Done] key.• Use only the toner bottle recommended for use on

this machine.• Never add more than one bottle of toner.• Add toner after the “Add toner” message is dis-

played.

NOTE• You can check how to add toner by pressing the

[Previous] or [Next] key on the screen.• If the toner runs out during a print job, the remain-

ing prints will be made after you add toner.

7-8 Adding Toner

7Lo

adin

g P

aper

and

Add

ing

Tone

r


1 Open the toner supply cover.

2 Hold the toner bottle with both hands and turn it up and down a few times as shown in the illustration, to evenly distribute the toner inside the bottle.

3 Align the protrusions of the toner bottle with the slots on the toner supply port. Gently press the toner bottle down onto the toner supply port until you hear a click.

The toner bottle is now locked onto the toner supply port.

4 Press down lightly on the toner bottle with one hand, and pull out the black shutter of the toner supply port as far as it will go.


7Lo

adin

g P

aper

and

Add

ing

Tone

r


5 Grip the shutter of the toner bottle, and pull it out slowly until it stops.

Toner flows into the toner box.

6 Lightly tap the top of the toner bottle to make sure that all of the toner empties into the toner box.

7 Push back the shutter of the toner bottle.

8 Make sure you hear a click when the black shutter of the toner supply port has been pushed back in as far as the position.

When the toner bottle starts to come loose from the toner supply port, lightly hold it so that it does not fall over.

CAUTION• Never try to remove the toner bottle before you

hear the click, doing so can damage the toner supply port.

7-10 Adding Toner

7Lo

adin

g P

aper

and

Add

ing

Tone

r


9 Remove the empty toner bottle from the toner supply port.

WARNING• Do not throw used toner bottles into open

flames, as this may ignite the toner remaining inside the bottle and result in burns or a fire.

CAUTION• When removing used toner bottles from the

toner supply port, remove the bottles carefully to prevent toner from scattering and entering your eyes or mouth. If toner enters your eyes or mouth, wash immediately with cold water and consult a physician.

10 Close the toner supply cover.

NOTE• Press the [Recover Later/Done] key to close the

screen prompting you to add toner.

11 Follow the instructions in the touch panel display.


7Lo

adin

g P

aper

and

Add

ing

Tone

r


Consumables and Options
The following consumables and accessories are available from Canon. For details, consult your ser-vice representative.
Consumables

■ Paper stockIn addition to plain paper (11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ STMT), transparencies, labels and other types of paper stock are available. For details, consult your service representative.

CAUTION• Do not store paper in places exposed to open

flames, as this may cause the paper to ignite and result in burns or a fire.

IMPORTANT• For high-quality print output, we recommend using

paper recommended by Canon.• To prevent moisture build-up, store any remaining

paper tightly wrapped in its original package.

■ Black tonerWhen the “Add toner” message appears in the touch panel display, add toner which has been approved for use with this machine. Only black toner can be used with this machine.

WARNING• Never dispose of waste toner in a fire or incin-

erator. Doing so may result in an explosion.

CAUTION• Do not store toner bottles in places exposed to

open flames, as this may cause the toner to ignite and result in burns or a fire.

IMPORTANT• Store toner bottles in a cool location away from

direct sunlight. (The recommended storage condi-tions: temperature below 86°F, and humidity below 80%.)

7-12 Consumables and Options

7Lo

adin

g P

aper

and

Add

ing

Tone

r


■ Genuine suppliesCanon has developed and manufactured parts, supplies and GPR-4 Toner specifically for use in this machine. As such, for superior print quality, we recommend that you use Canon-GENUINE brand parts, supplies and GPR-4 Toner in this machine. Ask your authorized Canon dealer or service provider for Canon-GENUINE brand parts, supplies and GPR-4 Toner.

We recommend that you order paper stock and toner from your service representative before they run out.

Options

CassetteThe paper drawer can be adjusted to hold the paper size you want to load. For instructions on how to adjust paper drawers for paper sizes, see “Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size,” on p. 7-6.You can adjust the paper drawer for the following paper sizes: 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR.



8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


TroubleshootingThis chapter describes what to do when there is a paper jam or a problem with print quality.

Removing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Removing Paper Jams in the Main Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Removing Paper Jams in the Right Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 3 or 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18Removing Paper Jams in the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20Removing Paper Jams in the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

Routine Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25Cleaning the Platen Glass/ Rear Side of Platen Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25Cleaning the Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26Original Scanned Using the Feeder Becomes Dirty (Feeder Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . 8-30Output Sheets are Dirty (Wire Cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31

Self-diagnostic (Error) Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32

If Memory Becomes Full During Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35

When the Power does not Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36

Service Call Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37

8C H A P T E R

8-1

8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


Removing Paper Jams
If a paper jam occurs, the following display appears in the touch panel display.
Display Indicating How to Clear the JamThe display indicating the location of the paper jam appears in the touch panel display, followed by instructions on how to clear the paper jam. This display will repeatedly appear in the touch panel display until the paper jam is entirely cleared.

● Example of display indicating the location of the paper jam.

■ When you select the [Recover Later] key:You can continue operations such as mode set-tings or scannings even when jammed paper is not removed.

IMPORTANT• When a paper jam occurs in the feeder, you cannot

continue the operation. Follow the directions in the display to remove the jammed paper.

● Example of display indicating how to clear the paper jam.

CAUTION• When removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the

original or paper.• When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow neck-

laces, bracelets or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.


• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and entering your eyes or mouth. If toner enters your eyes or mouth, wash immediately with cold water and consult a physician.

Paper Jams

Removing Paper Jams8-2

8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


1 Inspect all areas which appear in the touch panel display, and remove any jammed paper. See the appropriate pages for instructions on how to find and remove jammed paper.

● Display indicating locations of the paper jam and page number describing how to remove jammed paper.

IMPORTANT• If a jammed paper tears while being removed, be sure to remove any remaining pieces from inside the

machine.

2 If a paper jam occurs within the optional units, see the description on the pages for each option.

Feeder (See p. 8-22.)

Main unit (See p. 8-5.)

Paper drawer 2 (See p. 8-15.)

Stack bypass (See p. 8-20.)

Right cover (See p. 8-10.)

Paper drawer 3 or 4 (See p. 8-18.)

Paper drawer 1 (See p. 8-12.)

Exit slotRemove the protruding jammed paper.

● Finisher-F1, Saddle Finisher-F2, Puncher Unit-B1 (See p. 9-13, p. 9-29.)

● Paper Deck-G1 (See p. 9-4.)

● Copy Tray-C3 (See p. 9-35.)

Removing Paper Jams 8-3

8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


3 After you have removed all paper jams at the locations indicated in the touch panel dis-play, restore all levers and covers to their original positions.

4 Continue operations following the instructions displayed in the touch panel display.

● If there is remaining paper to be removed:The display indicating how to clear the paper jam appears in the touch panel display.Repeat the procedure from step 1.

NOTE• Once you have cleared the paper jam in locations other than the Feeder, print operation restarts.


8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


Removing Paper Jams in the Main UnitIf a paper jam occurs in the main unit, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper.

1 Open the front cover of the main unit.

2 Move the green lever in the direction of the arrow.

3 Grip the lever and pull out the fixing unit.

The fixing unit and duplexing unit are pulled out together.


8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


4 Remove any remaining jammed paper from the fixing unit.

5 Open the left cover.

6 Turn the green knob in the direction of the arrow, and remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION• The parts located around the cover are subject

to high temperatures. When removing jammed paper, take care not to touch anything in this area except this cover.

7 Turn the duplexing unit knob in the direction of the arrow displayed on the screen, and remove any jammed paper.


8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


8 Close the cover.

CAUTION• When closing the cover, be careful not to get

your fingers caught, as this may result in per-sonal injury.

9 Gently push the fixing unit back into its origi-nal position.

CAUTION• When returning the fixing unit to its original


10 Return the green lever to its original position.

11 Remove any remaining jammed paper from the duplexing unit.


8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


12 Remove any jammed paper while opening the left cover as shown in the illustration.

13 Remove any jammed paper while opening the right cover as shown in the illustration.

14 Open the duplexing transport unit, and remove any jammed papers.

15 Gently push the duplexing unit back to its original position.

CAUTION• When returning the duplexing unit to its origi-

nal position, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.


8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


16 Remove all jammed papers, and close the front cover.




(See “Display Indicating How to Clear the Jam,” on p. 8-2.)


8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


Removing Paper Jams in the Right CoverIf a paper jam occurs in the right cover, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper.

NOTE• When the Paper Deck-G1 (option) is attached,

move the paper deck away from the main unit. (See “Paper Deck-G1,” on p. 9-3.)

1 Open the right cover (upper) of the main unit.

2 Remove any jammed paper.

3 Close the right cover (upper).




8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


4 Open the right cover (lower) of the main unit.


6 Close the right cover (lower).






8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 1If a paper jam occurs in paper drawer 1, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper.





3 Close the right cover (upper) of the main unit.




8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


4 Press, then release the paper drawer release button of the paper drawer indicated on the touch panel display until the paper drawer comes out.

5 Pull out the paper drawer 1.




7 Return the paper drawer to its original posi-tion.


position, be careful not to catch your fingers between the edge of the paper drawer and the main unit.


8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g





8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 2If a paper jam occurs in paper drawer 2, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper.

1 Open the front cover of the main unit.

2 Turn the green knob in the direction of the arrow so as to feed the jammed paper to the duplexing unit.

3 Gently pull out the duplexing unit.


8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


4 Open the duplexing transport unit, and remove any jammed paper.

5 Gently push the duplexing unit back to its original position.

CAUTION• When returning the duplexing unit to its origi-

nal position, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.

6 Close the front cover of the main unit.



7 Press, then release the paper drawer release button of the paper drawer indicated on the touch panel display until the paper drawer comes out.


8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


8 Pull out the paper drawer 2.






position, be careful not to catch your fingers between the edge of the paper drawer and the main unit.




8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


Removing Paper Jams in Paper Drawer 3 or 4If a paper jam occurs in paper drawer 3 or 4, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper.

1 Press, then release the paper drawer release button of the paper drawer indicated in the touch panel display until the paper drawer comes out.

2 Pull out the paper drawer.





8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g



CAUTION• When returning the paper drawer to the original

position, be careful not to catch your fingers between the top of the paper drawer and the main unit.




8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


Removing Paper Jams in the Stack BypassIf a paper jam occurs in the stack bypass, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper.




2 Remove all paper from the stack bypass.



8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


4 Close the right cover (upper).






8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


Removing Paper Jams in the FeederIf a paper jam occurs in the feeder, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper.

1 Open the upper cover of the feeder.

2 Remove any jammed original.

3 Open the middle cover holding the knob in the back.


8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


4 Remove the jammed original.

5 Close the middle cover.



6 Turn the knob in the direction of the arrow, then remove the jammed original.

7 Once you have removed the entire jammed original, close the upper cover of the feeder.




8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


8 Open the feeder, and remove any jammed paper.

9 Close the feeder.





Routine Cleaning

8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g

If the original is not scanned clearly, clean the following parts. For high-quality outputs, we recom-mend cleaning them once or twice a month.

• Platen glass• Rear side of platen glass• Feeder Scanning area• White plate, Roller

WARNING• When cleaning the machine, first turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the power plug. Fail-

ure to observe these items may result in a fire or electrical shock.• Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner or other solvents for cleaning. Doing so might result in

plastic parts becoming deformed.

CAUTION• Unplug the power plug from the outlet at least once a year, and clean the area around the base of

the plug’s metal pins to ensure all dust is removed. If dust accumulates in this area, it may result in a fire.

• Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may damage the original or break the machine.

Cleaning the Platen Glass/ Rear Side of Platen GlassClean the platen glass or the rear side of platen glass following the procedure below.

IMPORTANT• If the platen glass or the rear side of platen glass is dirty, the original may not be scanned cleanly, or the

size of the original may be detected incorrectly.

■ Cleaning the Platen Glass

Clean the platen glass with a cloth dampened with water, then wipe with a dry cloth.

Routine Cleaning 8-25

8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


■ Cleaning the Rear Side of Platen Glass

Clean the rear side of platen glass with a cloth dampened with water, then wipe with a dry cloth.

Cleaning the FeederClean the feeder scanning area, white plate, and roller following the procedure below.

IMPORTANT• If the feeder scanning area is dirty, it may result in a paper jam or dirty print output.• Spin the roller while cleaning it.

1 Open the feeder cover.

2 Clean the roller (total of 8 places) at the rear side of the feeder cover with a cloth dampened with water, then wipe with a dry cloth.

Routine Cleaning8-26

8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


3 Clean the roller (total of 3 places) as shown in the illustration with a cloth dampened with water, then wipe with a dry cloth.

4 Open the middle cover holding the knob in the back.

5 Clean the roller (total of 5 places) with a cloth dampened with water, then wipe with a dry cloth.

6 Clean the roller (total of 4 places) with a cloth dampened with water, then wipe with a dry cloth.


8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


7 Close the middle cover.



8 Close the feeder cover.



9 Open the feeder.

10 Clean the feeder scanning area with a cloth dampened with water, then wipe with a dry cloth.


8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


11 Clean the white plate with a cloth dampened with water, then wipe with a dry cloth.

IMPORTANT• Do not push the white plate hard since the white

plate is soft.

12 Close the feeder.


8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


Original Scanned Using the Feeder Becomes Dirty (Feeder Cleaning)If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after feeding them in the feeder caused by the pencil powder etc. on the roller, perform the Feeder Cleaning.Cleaning is done by repeatedly feeding blank papers though the feeder.

NOTE• The Adjustment/Cleaning screen is made up of several screens. Use the [ ▼] and [▲] keys to scroll to the

desired screen and make the required settings.• When the [ ▼] or [▲] key should be pressed, the indication is displayed in this manual.• It takes about 10 seconds to clean the feeder.


2 Place 10 blank LTR-size paper in the feeder, then press the [Start] key.

NOTE• To cancel Feeder Cleaning, press the [Cancel] key.

When the feeder is being cleaned, the message on the right appears in the touch panel display.



Feeder Cleaning keyAdditional Functions


8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


Output Sheets are Dirty (Wire Cleaning)If dirt appears on printed paper, clean the wire of the corona assemblies as the need arises.

NOTE• It takes about 30 seconds to clean the wire.



NOTE• To cancel Wire Cleaning, press the [Cancel] key.

While wire cleaning is being performed, the message to the right appears in the touch panel display.



Wire Cleaning keyAdditional Functions


8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


Self-diagnostic (Error) Display
Self-diagnostic (error) messages appear in the touch panel display at the following times:• When printing cannot be performed because of an operational error.• When you need to make a judgment or take some action during scanning or printing.If a self-diagnostic message appears, follow the instructions in the touch panel display.
Load LTR-size paper.

The paper drawer loaded with the best paper size selected by the Automatic Paper selection is not inserted into the machine.

Load the indicated paper size in a paper drawer.If you press the key while this message is displayed, print will be made with the currently selected paper size.

If the message remains even when the indicated paper is loaded, set the Drawer Eligibility of that paper drawer to On . (See “Setting a Paper Drawer for Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching,” on p. 6-10.)

Add paper.

The machine has run out of paper. No more prints can be made.

The paper drawer is not correctly inserted.

Load paper.(See “Loading Paper,” on p. 7-2.)

Insert the paper drawer as far as it will go.(See “Loading Paper,” on p. 7-2.)

Message/ Cause Remedy

Return page 1 to the top, and then press the Start key.

Scanning was stopped due to a problem with the Feeder.

Arrange the originals in page order with the first page on top. Place the originals back in the Feeder original supply tray, then press the key.

Start

Start

Self-diagnostic (Error) Display8-32

8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


Attach the finisher to the main unit.

The Finisher is not properly connected to the main unit.

Connect the Finisher to the main unit properly.


Paper is jammed in the indicated location. Remove the jammed paper.

An original jam or paper jam has occurred, preventing you from making prints.

Remove paper from the machine following the guidance messages in the touch panel display.(See “Removing Paper Jams,” on p. 8-2.)

Add toner.

There is not enough toner to print. Add toner using the toner bottle recommended for use on this machine.(See “Adding Toner,” on p. 7-8.)

Remove the paper from the output tray.

Prints from the previous job remain in the output tray.

Remove the prints from the output tray, then press the key.

Start

Self-diagnostic (Error) Display 8-33

8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g



Place the original on the platen glass.

There is no original on the platen glass. The programed function (mode) requires the original to be placed in the feeder.

Place the originals on the platen glass.

Remove the original from the platen glass.

The original remains on the platen glass. Remove the original from the platen glass, then place the original again.

Remove the original from the feeder.

Original is placed both in the feeder and on the platen glass with the mode which the original cannot be placed in the feeder set.

Remove the original from the feeder.

Self-diagnostic (Error) Display8-34


If Memory Becomes Full During Scanning

8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g

If memory becomes full during scanning of originals, the following messages appear on the touch-panel display.

NOTE• The machine’s memory can hold about 3,700 originals (LTR-size Canon Standard Chart, Standard set-

ting) scanned in standard mode.

If the message asking whether to print the original pages scanned into memory appears, select the [Yes] or [No] key as appropriate.

● When you select the [Yes] key:Pages in memory are printed, and remaining originals are then scanned.

● When you select the [No] key:Pages in memory are not printed.

When processing is completed, the display returns to the Basic Features screen.

If the screen displayed on the right appears, press the [Cancel] key to return to the Basic Features screen.

If Memory Becomes Full During Scanning 8-35

8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


When the Power does not Turn ON
If the main power indicator on the control panel does not light even though the main power switch and control panel switch are both ON, be sure to check the breaker on the main unit to see if it is OFF.
If the breaker has gone OFF, do not turn it ON. Instead, contact your service representative.

WARNING• If the breaker is OFF position, do not switch the current leakage breaker back ON. Doing so may

lead to a fire, electrical shock, smoke, or the tripping of other breakers in the facility.

(I Side)

( Side)

When the Power does not Turn ON8-36


Service Call Message

8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g

If a malfunction occurs and the machine will not operate as normal, the message on the right (the service call message) will appear in the touch panel display.

If this message appears, follow the procedure described below.

WARNING• Do not insert or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as this may result in electrical shock.

CAUTION• Always grasp the plug portion when unplugging the power cord. Pulling on the power cord may

expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise damage the power cord. If the cord is damaged, this could cause an electricity leak and result in a fire or electrical shock.

IMPORTANT• If you turn the main power switch OFF when there is a reserved print job, that job will be erased.

1 Turn the main power switch OFF. Allow at least 10 seconds before turning the main power switch back ON.

Service Call Message 8-37

8Tr

oubl

esho

otin

g


2 If the machine still does not operate normally, carry out the following procedure, then con-tact your service representative:

Turn the main power switch OFF.

Unplug the power cable from the outlet.

Service Call Message8-38

Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


Handling Options

This chapter describes the use of options and what to do if there is a paper jam in an optional unit.

System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Paper Deck-G1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Removing Paper Jams in the Paper Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Loading Paper in the Paper Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Collate Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Group Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Offset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Staple Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Saddle Stitching Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Punch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Removing Paper Jams in the Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Replacing the Staple Case in the Stapler Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Removing Jammed Staples from the Stapler Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Removing Paper Jams in the Saddle Stitcher Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Replacing the Saddle Stitcher Unit Staple Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Removing Jammed Staples from the Saddle Stitcher Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Removing Paper Jams in the Puncher Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Removing Punch Waste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

Copy Tray-C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Removing Paper Jams in the Copy Tray-C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

9C H A P T E R

9-1

Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


System Configuration
The following options can be attached to the machine.
NOTE• Before using the touch panel, peel off the protective film from the display.

Main Unit Control Card IVN

Card Reader-C1

Finisher-F1

Puncher Unit-B1Copy Tray-C3

Paper Deck-G1

Saddle Finisher-F2

System Configuration9-2


Paper Deck-G1

Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9

If you attach the Paper Deck-G1 to the machine, one extra size of paper can be used in addition to the paper sizes in the paper drawers of the main unit.Up to 3,500 sheets (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)) of paper can be loaded in the paper deck.

IMPORTANT• When the machine is in the Low-Power mode (the touch panel is not displayed, and only the key

and the Main Power indicator are lit), you may not be able to open the paper deck. In this case, press the key beforehand to reactivate the machine, then press the Open button.

NOTE• Paper size of the Paper Deck is fixed to LTR.


Energy Saver

Energy Saver

Release LeverPress to remove the Paper Deck from the Main Unit.

Open buttonPress to load paper or to check for a paper jam.

Paper Supply indicatorEnables you to check the amount of paper remaining in the Paper Deck.

Paper DeckMax. 3,500 sheets (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)) can be stacked.

Paper Deck-G1 9-3

Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


Removing Paper Jams in the Paper DeckIf a paper jam occurs in the Paper Deck-G1, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper.






1 Press the release lever to remove the Paper Deck from the main unit.


Paper Deck-G19-4

Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


3 Press the Open button to open the Paper Deck.

IMPORTANT• When the machine is in the Low-Power mode (the

touch panel is not displayed, and only the key and the Main Power indicator are lit), you may not be able to open the paper deck. In this case, press the key beforehand to reactivate the machine, then press the Open button.


5 Close the Paper Deck and reconnect it to the main unit.

CAUTION• When reconnecting the Paper Deck to the main

unit, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.



Energy Saver

Energy Saver

Paper Deck-G1 9-5

Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


Loading Paper in the Paper Deck

1 Press the Open button to open the Paper Deck.

IMPORTANT• When the machine is in the Low-Power mode (the

touch panel is not displayed, and only the key and the Main Power indicator are lit), you may not be able to open the paper deck. In this case, press the key beforehand to reactivate the machine, then press the Open button.

2 Open a package of paper, and remove the paper stack (Make sure that the seam on the center of the package is face up).

CAUTION• When loading paper, take care not to cut your

hands on the edges of the paper.

IMPORTANT• Rewrap any remaining paper in its original pack-

age, and store it in a dry place away from direct sunlight.

• Do not copy on the following types of paper stock. Doing so may cause a paper jam.- Severely curled or wrinkled paper.- Transparencies.- Paper which has been copied on using a digital

full color copier (do not copy on the reverse side either).

- Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (do not copy on the reverse side either).

NOTE• The Paper Deck holds up to about 3,500 sheets of paper (20-lb bond (80 g/m2)).• For high-quality prints, we recommend using paper recommended by Canon.

Energy Saver

Energy Saver

Paper Deck-G19-6

Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


3 Place it in the paper deck.

IMPORTANT• If the paper is curled, curl it down before placing it

in the paper drawer.• Make sure that the height of the paper stack does

not exceed the limit mark at the back of the paper drawer.

4 Close the Paper Deck.

CAUTION• When returning the Paper Deck to its original


NOTE• For details of print direction of paper already

printed with logos or patterns, see “Relation of Original Orientation and Paper Orientation,” on p. 11-9.

Paper Deck-G1 9-7

Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1
Finisher-F1Saddle Finisher-F2Puncher Unit-B1

Tray A

Tray B

Booklet trayThe paper that is folded and stapled at the center to form a booklet is delivered to this tray.* Only available in the Saddle Finisher-F2.

Upper coverOpen to removed jamed paper. (See “Removing Paper Jams in the Finisher,” on p. 9-13.)

Front cover (upper)Open this cover to replace the staple case in the staple unit, or when a staple jam occurs. (See “Replacing the Staple Case in the Stapler Unit,” on p. 9-15, “Remov-ing Jammed Staples from the Stapler Unit,” on p. 9-18.)

Front cover (lower)Open this cover when a paper jam or staple jam occurs in the saddle stitcher unit, or when replacing the saddle stitcher unit staple cartridge. (See “Removing Paper Jams in the Saddle Stitcher Unit,” on p. 9-21, “Replacing the Saddle Stitcher Unit Staple Car-tridge,” on p. 9-24, and “Removing Jammed Staples from the Saddle Stitcher Unit,” on p. 9-26.) * Only available in the Saddle Fin-isher-F2.

Front cover of the puncher unitOpen this cover when a paper jam occurs in the puncher unit, or when removing the punch waste. (See “Removing Paper Jams in the Puncher Unit,” on p. 9-29, “Remov-ing Punch Waste,” on p. 9-32.)

*This illustration shows the Saddle Finisher-F2 with the Puncher Unit-B1 attached to it.* In the description on the following pages Finisher-F1 and Saddle Finisher-F2 are referred to collectively as “Finisher” unless otherwise stated.

Top cover of the puncher unitOpen this cover when a paper jam occurs in the puncher unit. (See “Removing Paper Jams in the Puncher Unit,” on p. 9-29.)

Output TrayPapers are output to these trays. You can assign the trays so that the output of a specified function is output to a desig-nated tray.

Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B19-8

Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


Collate ModeThis function automatically collates print sets into page order before they are delivered.

Group ModeThis function outputs all prints of the same page in one set and slightly shifts the output position of print sets to make them easier to handle.

NOTE• When the Collate or Group mode is set, the tray moves down when each set of paper is delivered. When

the delivered paper reaches the stacking limit of the tray, the paper is automatically delivered to another acceptable tray. When the paper reaches the stacking limit of all of the acceptable trays, printing stops temporarily. After you remove the delivered paper from the tray, the tray moves up the corresponding dis-tance and printing of the remaining sets restarts.

Offset ModeThis function outputs papers shifted to the front.

IMPORTANT• You cannot set the Offset mode when printing on STMTR-size paper.

NOTE• These functions shift each set of output paper about 1-1/4" (30 mm) before delivery, when the Collate

function or Group function has been set, and copies are made or prints output from a computer.

Staple ModeThis function automatically collates print sets into page order, staples the sets, and outputs them.

CAUTION• Do not put your hand in the tray’s stapling area when the machine is equipped with the Finisher.

Doing so may result in injury.

IMPORTANT• The tray moves down when each set of paper is delivered. When the delivered paper reaches the stacking

limit of the tray, the printing stops temporarily. Remove all the paper on the tray, and the remaining printing and stapling will restart.

NOTE• If the number of sheets in one set exceeds 30 (for 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR size) or 50 (for LTR size), stapling

will not be performed. Only the Collating will be performed.• If the machine stops during stapling and a message is displayed, it means that almost all of the staples

have been used up and the staple cartridge must be replaced. Replace the staple cartridge in this case. (See “Replacing the Staple Case in the Stapler Unit,” on p. 9-15.)

Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2/ Puncher Unit-B1 9-9

Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


Copies are stapled at the following places.

● When an original is placed on the platen glass:

● When originals are placed in the Feeder:

IMPORTANT• You cannot set the Staple mode when printing on transparencies, tracing papers, and labels.• You cannot corner-staple STMTR-size paper.• You cannot double-staple LGL/ LTRR/ STMTR-size paper.

● Double staple area● Corner staple area

ABC

ABC

ABC

ABC

Upper left

Upper right

Lower right

Lower left

Upper left

Upper right

Lower right

Lower left

Left side

Right side

Left side

Right side

● Double staple area● Corner staple area

ABC

ABC

ABC

ABC

Upper rightUpper leftLower leftLower right

Upper rightUpper leftLower leftLower right

Right side

Left side

Right side

Left side


Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


Saddle Stitching ModeThis function enables you to make booklets consisting of pages folded and stapled at the center.

IMPORTANT• This function is only available with the Saddle Finisher-F2.• The maximum number of sheets that can be bound is 15 (60 pages).• The paper sizes that can be saddle stitched are 11"x17" and LTRR.

65 4

3

4

3

2

1

3

8

7

6

5

8

7 2

1

6

8 1

The pages are folded with a roller to form a booklet.

Originals

Saddle stitch

Copy


Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


Punch ModeThis function punches holes (2 or 3 holes) in the printed sheets.● The hole punched area is as shown in the illustration.

IMPORTANT• The machine automatically selects the type of hole punch (2 or 3 holes) depending on the selected paper

size.- 2 holes: LGL/ LTRR- 3 holes: 11"x17"/ LTR

• Holes cannot be punched in transparencies, tracing papers labels and 3-hole punch.• You cannot punch holes in STMTR-size paper.

NOTE• This function is only available when the Finisher is equipped with the Puncher Unit-B1.

● The distance between the punch holes is as shown in the illustration.

ABC

ABC

V

ABC

V

ABC

Hole punchedarea

Hole punchedarea

Hole punchedarea

Hole punchedarea

● Feeder● Platen glass

4-1/4"(108 mm)

4-1/4"(108 mm)

2-3/4"(70 mm)

3 holes 2 holes


Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


Removing Paper Jams in the FinisherIf a paper jam occurs using the Finisher, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper.






1 Remove any paper protruding from the output tray.

IMPORTANT• When making prints with the Staple mode, do not

remove the output sheets not yet stapled. (Stapling will be performed after removing the jammed paper.)

2 Open the top cover and check the inside of the Finisher.


Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


3 Lift cover 1 upward, and remove any jammed paper. Then, return cover 1 to its original posi-tion.



4 Lift cover 2 upward, and remove any jammed paper.

NOTE• When you pull up cover 2, cover 1 is pulled up

together with it.

5 Return cover 2, and close the top cover.






Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


Replacing the Staple Case in the Stapler UnitWhen the Finisher runs out of staples, the staple case must be replaced. The message on the right will appear in the touch panel display. Follow the procedure described below to replace the staple case.

1 Open the front cover (upper) of the Finisher

2 Push down the green lever.

The staple cartridge will slightly come out.

3 Pull out the protruding staple cartridge hold-ing it by its left and right sides.


Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


4 Pull out the empty staple case holding it by its left and right sides.

NOTE• Place the staple cartridge as shown in the illustra-

tion, then pull out the staple case.

5 Insert the new staple case.

NOTE• Only one staple case can be inserted at a time.• Use only the special staple case for use on this

machine.

6 Remove the seal fixing the staples by pulling it straight out.

7 Gently push the staple cartridge back into the Finisher until the green lever returns to its original position.


Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


8 Make sure that the staple cartridge is firmly secured, then close the front cover (upper) of the Finisher.



NOTE• When you close the cover, the staple unit automati-

cally performs a “dry” stapling operation several times to reposition the staples.


Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


Removing Jammed Staples from the Stapler UnitIf a staple jam occurs, the screen on the right appears. Follow the procedure described below to remove any jammed staples.

1 Open the front cover (upper) of the Finisher.

2 Push down the green lever.

The staple cartridge will slightly come out.

3 Pull out the protruding staple cartridge hold-ing it by its left and right sides.


Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


4 Lower the knob of the staple cartridge.

5 Remove all of the staples that slide from the staple case.

6 Return the knob of the staple cartridge to its original position.

7 Gently push the staple cartridge back into the Finisher until the green lever returns to its original position.


Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


8 Make sure that the staple cartridge is firmly secured, then close the front cover (upper) of the Finisher.



NOTE• When you close the cover, the staple unit automati-

cally performs a “dry” stapling operation several times to reposition the staples.


Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


Removing Paper Jams in the Saddle Stitcher UnitIf a paper jam occurs when the booklet mode was set using Saddle Finisher-F2, the screen shown at right appears. Remove the jammed paper according to the instructions on the screen.

NOTE• This procedure is only required when Saddle Fin-

isher-F2 is attached.






1 Move the Saddle Finisher-F2 away from the main unit, holding the section indicated in the figure on the right.

2 Remove the paper in the stack.


Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


3 Connect the Saddle Finisher-F2 to the main unit.

CAUTION• When returning the Finisher to its original posi-

tion, be careful not to catch your fingers between the edge of the Finisher and the main unit.

4 Open the front cover (lower) of the Finisher.

5 Turn the knob on the right.

6 Turn the knob on the left while pressing it.


Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9



8 Close the front cover (lower) of the Finisher.






Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


Replacing the Saddle Stitcher Unit Staple CartridgeWhen the Finisher runs out of staples, the staple cartridge must be replaced. The screen on the right will appear in the touch panel display. Follow the procedure described below to replace the staple cartridge.

NOTE• This procedure is only required when the Saddle Fin-



2 Pull out the saddle stitcher unit.

3 Pull the stapler unit of the saddle stitcher unit, then push it up.


Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


4 Pull out the empty staple cartridge holding it by its left and right sides.

5 Insert the new staple cartridge.

IMPORTANT• Replace both the inner and outer staple cartridges

at the same time.

6 Pull the stapler unit of the saddle stitcher unit, then return it to its original position.

7 Push back the saddle stitcher unit, then close the front cover (lower).



IMPORTANT• Once you have removed the jammed staples, be

sure to reposition staples for the saddle stitcher unit. (See “Staple Repositioning for Saddle Fin-isher,” on p. 6-32.)


Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


Removing Jammed Staples from the Saddle Stitcher UnitIf a staple jam occurs, the screen on the right appears. Follow the procedure described below to remove any jammed staples.

NOTE• This procedure is only required when the Saddle Fin-



2 Pull out the saddle stitcher unit.

3 Pull the stapler unit of the saddle stitcher unit, then push it up.


Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


4 Grasp the left and right ends of the staple car-tridge, and remove the cartridge.

5 Push down part A, then pull up knob B.

6 Remove the jammed staples, then return knob B to its original position.

7 Return the staple cartridge to its original posi-tion.

A

B


Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


8 Pull the stapler unit of the saddle stitcher unit, then return it to its original position.

9 Push back the saddle stitcher unit, then close the front cover (lower).



IMPORTANT• Once you have removed the jammed staples, be

sure to reposition staples for the saddle stitcher unit. (See “Staple Repositioning for Saddle Fin-isher,” on p. 6-32.)


Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


Removing Paper Jams in the Puncher UnitWhen paper jams occur while the punch function is being used, the screen on the right is displayed. In addition to removing the paper jam in the main unit, also check the puncher unit with the following procedure and remove any jammed paper.

NOTE• This procedure is only required when the Puncher

Unit-B1 is attached.






1 Open the front cover of the puncher unit.

2 Align the ▲ of the knob to the range of .


Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


3 Close the front cover of the puncher unit.



4 Open the top cover of the puncher unit.


6 Close the top cover of the puncher unit.




Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9





Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


Removing Punch WasteWhen the punch waste tray becomes full with debris, the screen on the right appear in the display. Follow the procedure described below to remove the punch waste.

NOTE• This procedure is only required when the Puncher

Unit-B1 is attached.

1 Open the front cover of the puncher unit.

2 Pull out the punch waste tray.

3 Discard the punch waste.


Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


4 Return the punch waste tray to its original position.

NOTE• If the tray is not returned securely in place, you

cannot make prints with the Punch mode selected.

5 Close the front cover of the puncher unit.



Consumables

■ Staple cartridgeUse only the staple cartridges recommended for use on this machine. There is a space behind the front cover (upper) for storing staple cartridges (equivalent to the space occupied by three staple unit staple cartridges).We recommend that you order staple cartridges from your service representative before they run out.


Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


Copy Tray-C3
The Copy Tray-C3 is equipped with the following functions:
● Collate● Group● Rotate

IMPORTANT• The paper size which can be selected when you set the Rotate mode are LTR/ LTRR.


NOTE• Adjust the auxiliary tray depending on the print paper

size.

Copy Tray-C3Papers are output here.

Copy Tray-C39-34

Han

dlin

g O

ptio

ns9


Removing Paper Jams in the Copy Tray-C3If a paper jam occurs in the Copy Tray-C3, a display similar to the one on the right appears in the touch panel display. Check where the jam occurred, and follow the procedure below and the procedure that appears in the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper.






Pull out the protruding paper from the exit slot.

Copy Tray-C3 9-35


10O

pera

tion

Whe

n U

ser R

estr

ictio

ns a

re E

nabl

ed a

nd

How

to E

nter

Alp

habe

t Cha

ract

ers


Operation When User Restrictions are Enabled and How to Enter Alphabet Characters

This chapter describes operations when user restrictions are enabled, the character entry method, etc.

Operation When User Restrictions Are Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Inserting the Control Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Operations before Using Copy or Mail Box Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Operations after Using Copy or Mail Box Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Entering the Department ID and Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Operations after Turning the Power ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Operations after Using Copy Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6Entering Alphabet Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6Entering Special Letters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

Setting in Inches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

10C H A P T E R

10-1

10O

pera

tion

Whe

n U

ser R

estr

ictio

ns a

re E

nabl

ed a

nd

How

to E

nter

Alp

habe

t Cha

ract

ers


Operation When User Restrictions Are Enabled
Inserting the Control CardWhen the Control Card IVN or Card Reader-C1 (option) is attached to the machine, you must insert the control card before operating this machine.
IMPORTANT• When the Basic Features screen does not appear in the touch panel display even if the control card is

inserted, check the followings:- Make sure that the control card is inserted in the correct direction.- Make sure that the control card is inserted as far as it can go.- Make sure that an unusable control card is not inserted.

NOTE• For details on how to handle the Control Card IVN, see the Control Card Instruction Manual.• For details on how to change the password and how to check, print, and erase the counting information

with Card Reader-C1, see “Setting the Department ID Management,” on p. 6-58.• When the Card Reader-C1 is attached, you can use the following two cards: The optical type card can

manage up to 200 departments, and the magnetic type card can manage up to 3000 departments. The maximum number of departments that can be managed, depends on the main unit. The imageRUNNER 5000 can manage up to 1000 departments.

Card Reader-C1CONTROL CARD

1 2 3

CONTROL CARD III

001

1 2 3

Magnetic type card Optical type Card

Operation When User Restrictions Are Enabled10-2

10O

pera

tion

Whe

n U

ser R

estr

ictio

ns a

re E

nabl

ed a

nd

How

to E

nter

Alp

habe

t Cha

ract

ers


Operations before Using Copy or Mail Box FunctionsNOTE

• For details on how to turn the power ON, see “Main Power and Control Panel Power,” on p. 1-6.

1 Insert the control card into the card slot mak-ing sure it is facing the correct direction.

IMPORTANT• When the Control Card IVN is attached, check if

there is a reserved copy job in the System Monitor screen. If you remove the control card, the reserved copy job will be canceled.

• When you reserve or interrupt a job with Control Card IVN attached, do not remove the control card. If you remove the control card, the reserved copy job will be canceled.

2 The basic screen of the selected function is displayed.

Operations after Using Copy or Mail Box Functions

After you finish using this machine, remove the control card.

The touch panel display returns to the screen for inserting the control card.

IMPORTANT• After a control card is removed, it must be inserted

again before operating the machine.• If you reserved a job with Control Card IVN

attached, do not remove the control card until that job is completed.

• When using the control card, we recommend checking if there is a reserved copy job in the Sys-tem Monitor screen.

Control Card

Operation When User Restrictions Are Enabled 10-3

10O

pera

tion

Whe

n U

ser R

estr

ictio

ns a

re E

nabl

ed a

nd

How

to E

nter

Alp

habe

t Cha

ract

ers


Entering the Department ID and Password
When Department ID Management has been set, the Department ID and Password must be entered before operating this machine.
NOTE• When you are using the control card, the message “You must insert a control card.” appears in the touch

panel display. Insert the control card into the card slot. (See “Inserting the Control Card,” on p. 10-2.)

Operations after Turning the Power ONNOTE

• For details on how to turn the power ON, see “Main Power and Control Panel Power,” on p. 1-6.

1 Press the [Department ID] key, and enter the Department ID with the Numeric keys ( - ).

NOTE• If you make a mistake when entering values, press

the key, and enter the values again.

2 Press the [Password] key, and enter the pass-word with the Numeric keys ( - ).

NOTE• If you make a mistake when entering the password,

press the key, and enter the password again.• If a password has not been set, proceed to step 3.

0 9

CClear

0 9

CClear

Entering the Department ID and Password10-4

10O

pera

tion

Whe

n U

ser R

estr

ictio

ns a

re E

nabl

ed a

nd

How

to E

nter

Alp

habe

t Cha

ract

ers


3 Press the key.

4 The basic screen of the selected function is displayed.

NOTE• If the Department ID and/or Password that you

entered are wrong, the message “Wrong ID or password” appears. Repeat the procedure from step 1.

Operations after Using Copy Functions

When operating is completed, press the key on the control panel.

The screen for entering the Department ID and Password appears. To operate again, enter the Department ID and Password again.

IMPORTANT

• If you do not press the key after finishing your operation, any subsequent copies will be totaled under the same Department ID which you previ-ously entered.

NOTE• When operating is completed, the screen for enter-

ing the Password automatically appears after the set time has elapsed if you forget to press the key. (See “Auto Clear Function,” on p. 48.)

?

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0ID

9

C

Reset

Guide


Interrupt Clear

ID

?

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0ID

9

C

Reset

Guide


Interrupt Clear

ID

ID

ID

Entering the Department ID and Password 10-5

10O

pera

tion

Whe

n U

ser R

estr

ictio

ns a

re E

nabl

ed a

nd

How

to E

nter

Alp

habe

t Cha

ract

ers


Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display
At screens which require alphanumeric entry, enter characters using the alphabet keys displayed in the touch panel display as described below.
Entering Alphabet CharactersExample: Enter “canon”.

1 Press the [Entry Mode] key, and select “Alpha-bet”.

NOTE• Each press of the [Entry Mode] key switches the

entry mode.• If you press the [Uppercase] key, the entry mode

changes to the upper case mode, and upper case characters can be entered.

2 Enter “canon”.

NOTE• The available modes and maximum number of let-

ters vary depending on the purpose.• To enter a space, press the [Space] key.• To move the cursor, press the [ ] or [ ] key.• If you make a mistake when entering characters,

use the [ ] or [ ] key and the [Backspace] key to delete the character. Then, enter the correct char-acter.

• You can also delete all characters you have entered by pressing the key.

• To continue entering special letters, press the [Entry Mode] key to select the desired mode. Then, enter the character.

3 When you have entered all characters, press the [OK] key.

CClear

Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display10-6

10O

pera

tion

Whe

n U

ser R

estr

ictio

ns a

re E

nabl

ed a

nd

How

to E

nter

Alp

habe

t Cha

ract

ers


Entering Special LettersExample: Enter “é”.

1 Press the [Entry Mode] key, and select “Other”.

NOTE• Each press of the [Entry Mode] key switches the

entry mode.

2 Press the [▼] or [▲] key to display the desired special letter.

Press the desired special letter in the touch panel display.

NOTE• The available modes and maximum number of let-

ters vary depending on the purpose.• To enter a space, press the [Space] key.• To move the cursor, press the [ ] or [ ] key.• If you make a mistake when entering special let-

ters, use the [ ] or [ ] key and the [Backspace] key to delete the character. Then, enter the correct character.

• You can also delete all characters you have entered by pressing the key.

• To continue entering alphabet characters, press the [Entry Mode] key to select the desired mode. Then, enter the character.

3 When you have finished entering the special letters, press the [OK] key.

CClear

Entering Characters on the Touch Panel Display 10-7

10O

pera

tion

Whe

n U

ser R

estr

ictio

ns a

re E

nabl

ed a

nd

How

to E

nter

Alp

habe

t Cha

ract

ers


Setting in Inches
When entering values in inches in the modes which require number entry, set the inch entry function to On in the Common Settings of the Additional Functions. You can make entry in inches when you press the [Inch] key on the screen which requires number entry.The example shows the inch entry in the Zoom Program mode.
Press the [1] [_] [1] [/] and [2] keys on the touch panel display in that order.

The entered values is displayed as shown on the right.

Setting in Inches10-8

App

endi

x11


Appendix

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5Paper Deck-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6Puncher Unit-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8Copy Tray-C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8Card Reader-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Relation of Original Orientation and Paper Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Chart of Available Combination of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10Copy Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10Mail Box Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15

11C H A P T E R

11-1

11A

ppen

dix


Specifications
Specifications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release.
Main UnitName Canon imageRUNNER 5000 Series

Type Console

Platen Stationary

Photoconductive material A-si

Copying system Electrostatic Transfer System

Developing system Toner Projection System

Fixing system Heat Roller system

Resolution Reading 600 dpi x 600 dpiWriting approx. 1,200 dpi x 600 dpi Printing approx. 2,400 dpi x 600 dpi

Number of tones 256

Acceptable paper stock Plain paperPaper drawer 1, 2 : 17-lb bond to 110-lb index

(64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2)Paper drawer 3, 4 : 17-lb bond to 24-lb bond

(64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2)Stack bypass : 17-lb bond to 110-lb index

(64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2)

Transparency*, Tracing paper*, Labels*, Heavy, Recycled, Color, Letterhead, Bond, 3-Hole Punch (*stack bypass selected)

Acceptable originals Sheet, books, 3-dimensional objects (Up to 4.4-lb bond or 2 kg)

Maximum original size 11"x17"

Paper sizes Paper drawer 1, 2: LTRPaper drawer 3, 4: 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMTRYou can only change the sizes of the paper drawer 3.Stack bypass : 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMTR

Free-size: 4" x 5-7/8" to 11-5/8" x 17"(100 x 148 mm to 297 x 432 mm)

Specifications11-2

App

endi

x11


Non-image areas Leading edge: 1/8" (4.0 mm)Left and right side: 1/8" (2.5 mm)Trailing edge: 1/8" (2.0 mm)

Warm-up time When main power is turned ON:5 minutes max.

Activation time from Sleep mode:5 minutes max.

Activation time from Energy Saver mode:None : 0 second–10% mode: approx. 50 sec.–25% mode: approx. 90 sec.–50% mode: approx. 180 sec.

*Activation time from each mode is a rough standard until the machine is ready to copy after canceling the mode. Activation time may vary depending on the conditions under which the machine is used. (In all cases, at a room temperature of 68°F.)

First copy time Platen glass selected : 3.8 seconds max.

Copy speedDirect imageRUNNER 5000

11"x17" 30 cpmLGL 36 cpmLTR 50 cpmLTRR 39 cpmSTMTR 50 cpm

Reduction11"x17"→ STMTR (50%) 50 cpm11"x17"→ LTRR (64%) 39 cpm11"x17"→ LGL (73%) 36 cpmLGL→ LTR (78%) 39 cpm

EnlargementLGL→ 11"x17" (121%) 30 cpmLTRR → 11"x17" (129%) 30 cpmSTMT→ 11"x17" (200%) 30 cpm

: Except the stack bypass.

Specifications 11-3

11A

ppen

dix


Magnification Direct1 : 1 (±0.5%)

Reduction1 : 0.789 (LGL→ LTR)1 : 0.733 (11"x17"→ LGL/ 11"x15"→ LTR)1 : 0.647 (11"x17"→ LTR)1 : 0.500 (11"x17"→ STMT)1 : 0.250

Enlargement1 : 1.214 (LGL→ 11"x17")1 : 1.294 (LTR→ 11"x17")1 : 2.000 (STMT→ 11"x17")1 : 4.000

Paper feeding system Paper drawer 1, 2 (1,500 sheets each) Paper drawer 3, 4 (550 sheets each) Stack bypass (stack bypass tray: 50 sheets 20-Ib bond (80 g/m2); stack approx. 1/4" (5 mm) high)

Exposure control Automatic exposure control or manual exposure control

Multiple copies 999 sheets max.

Power source 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 15 A

Max power consumption 1.5 kW

Dimensions (H x W x D) 44-3/4" x 25-3/8" x 29-1/4"(1,136 mm x 643 mm x 743 mm)

Installation space (W x D) 52-5/8" x 29-1/4" (1,335 mm x 743 mm) (Dimensions of eject tray and stack bypass tray are given for extended condition.)

Weight Approx. 462 lb (210 kg)

Specifications11-4

App

endi

x11


FeederOriginals 11" x 17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR/ STMT

Original paper weights 13-lb bond to 32-lb bond (50 g/m2 to 128 g/m2)

Original tray capacity 100 sheets

Original replacement speed 55 sheets/minute (LTR)

Power source From main unit

Power consumption When active : 48 W max.When not active : 2.5 W max.

Dimensions (H x W x D) 5-7/8" x 22-1/4" x 21-1/2"(149 mm x 565 mm x 545 mm)

Weight Approx. 30.8 lb (14 kg)

Paper Deck-G1Paper deck capacity 3,500 sheets (20-lb bond (80 g/m2))


Power consumption 40 W

Dimensions (H x W x D) 22-5/8" x 12-3/4" x 23" (574 mm x 323 mm x 583 mm)

Weight Approx. 101 lb (46 kg)

Acceptable paper size LTR

Specifications 11-5

11A

ppen

dix


Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2Paper 17-lb bond to 110-lb index (64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2)

Saddle Stitcher Unit* : 17-lb bond to 20-lb bond(64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2)

(For cover sheets only* : 17-lb bond to 110-lb index(64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2))

Capacity per tray [Non-collate mode]LTR/ STMTR : 5-3/4" (147 mm) (equivalent

to 1,000 sheets 20-lb bond (80 g/m2))

11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR : 2-7/8" (74 mm) (equivalent to 500 sheets 20-lb bond (80 g/m2))

[Collate mode] [Group mode]LTR/ STMTR : 5-3/4" (147 mm) (equivalent

to 1,000 sheets 20-lb bond (80 g/m2))

11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR : 2-7/8" (74 mm) (equivalent to 500 sheets 20-lb bond (80 g/m2))

[Staple mode]LTR : 30 sets or 4-3/8" (110 mm)

(equivalent to 750 sheets 20-lb bond (80 g/m2))

11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR : 30 sets or 2-7/8" (74 mm) (equivalent to 500 sheets 20-lb bond (80 g/m2))

[Non-collate]/ [Collate]/ [Group], with different paper size1-3/4" (44 mm) (equivalent to 300 sheets 20-lb bond (80 g/m2))

[Staple] with different paper size30 sets or 7/8" (22 mm) (equivalent to 150 sheets 20-lb bond (80 g/m2))

[Saddle Stitch]*1 to 5 sheets : 25 sets6 to 10 sheets : 15 sets

11 to 15 sheets : 10 sets

Specifications11-6

App

endi

x11


Max. stapling capacity Staple UnitLTR : 50 sheets11"x17"/ LGL/ LTRR : 30 sheets

Saddle Stitcher Unit * : 15 sheets

Available offset size 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRR

Available staple size Corner staple: 11"x17"/ LGL/ LTR/ LTRRDouble staple: 11"x17"/ LTR

Available saddle stitch size* 11"x17"/ LTRR

Saddle Stitcher Folding Method* Roller pressure folding

Saddle Stitcher Folding mode* V-fold

Power consumption 170 W max.


Dimensions (H x W x D) Finisher41-3/8" x 26-3/8" x 24-1/4"(1,052 mm x 669 mm x 614 mm)

Finisher + Puncher Unit-B141-3/8" x 29-3/8" x 24-1/4"(1,052 mm x 744.5 mm x 614 mm)

Installation location (W x D) Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F261-3/8" x 29-1/4"(1,559 mm x 743 mm)

Finisher-F1/ Saddle Finisher-F2 + Puncher Unit-B164-3/8" x 29-1/4"(1,634 mm x 743 mm)

Saddle Finisher-F2 (The width includes necessaryspace for removing paper jams.)

72-5/8" x 29-1/4"(1,844 mm x 743 mm)

Weight Finisher-F1: Approx. 70.5 lb (32 kg)Saddle Finisher-F2: Approx. 114 lb (52 kg)Finisher-F1 + Puncher Unit-B1:

Approx. 82.4 lb (37.4 kg)Saddle Finisher-F2 + Puncher Unit-B1:

Approx. 126 lb (57.4 kg)

*Saddle Finisher-F2 only.

Specifications 11-7

11A

ppen

dix


Puncher Unit-B1Paper 17-lb bond to 110-lb index (64 g/m2 to 200 g/m2)

Hole punching system Sequential processing system

Punch hole quantity, hole diameter2 holes/ 3 holes, 8±0.5 mm

Distance between punch holes

3 holes: 4-1/4" (108mm)2 holes: 2-3/4" (70 mm)

Paper size in which holes can be punched3 holes: 11"x17"/ LTR2 holes: LGL/ LTRR

Punch waste tray capacity Approx. 3,000 sheets (20-lb bond (80 g/m2))

Power consumption 120W max.

Power source From the Finisher

Dimensions (H x W x D) 34-7/8" x 3" x 24-1/4"(886 mm x 75.5 mm x 614.4 mm)

Weight Approx. 11.9 lb (5.4 kg)

Copy Tray-C3Capacity 250 sheets (20-lb bond (80 g/m2))

Dimensions (H x W x D) 4" x 18-3/8" x 13-3/8" (100 mm x 465 mm x 340 mm)

Weight Approx. 1.4 lb (670 g)

Card Reader-C1Card to be Used Magnetic type card, Optical type card

Card readout method Magnetic/Optical readout

Magnetic Card Reading Direction

Inserting Direction

Store/ Replay Replay

Power Source From main unit

Size (H x W x D) 1-1/8” x 3-1/2” x 4 (32 mm x 88 mm x 100 mm)

Weight 10.4 oz (295 g)

Specifications11-8


Relation of Original Orientation and Paper Orientation

App

endi

x11

● When you set the left-side stapling

NOTE• Please use this chart when printing on paper with logos etc., printed beforehand.

Confidential Confidential

Confidential

Confidential

Confidential

Confidential Confidential

Confidential

Con

fiden

tial

Confidential

Confidential

Confidential

Con

fiden

tial

Confidential

Confidential

Confidential

Confidential

Confidential

Confidential

Orientation in paper drawer 1, 2

Orientation in paper drawer 3, 4

Orientation in stack bypass/paper deck

Orientation on the platen glass

Orientation in the feeder

Auto Orientation setting

Staple setting

Staple setting

Original/ paper orientation, settings

Either On or Off Either On or Off Either On or Off

Either On or Off(Set to On when paper orientation in paper drawers is vertical.)

Output example

LTR 11"x17", LGL LTR 11"x17", LGL

Corner :TopLeftDouble :Left

Corner :TopRightDouble :Right

Corner :TopLeft Corner :TopLeftDouble :Left



Corner :TopRight Corner :TopRightDouble :Right

Relation of Original Orientation and Paper Orientation 11-9

11A

ppen

dix


Chart of Available Combination of Functions
The chart shows how the settings will be when you want to set a function different from a function already set.
Copy Function

EnlargementZoom DesignationXY ZoomAuto Zoom modeZoom ProgramEntire ImageAutomatic Exposure ControlPrinted ImagePhotoTextText/PhotoAutomatic Paper SelectionAutomatic Paper Selection, Auto OrientationAuto Drawer SwitchingStack BypassCollateGroupRotate CollatingRotate GroupingOffset CollateOffset GroupStapleSaddle StitchHole PunchInterrupt CopyReserve Copy1 2-Sided2 2-Sided2 1-SidedBook 2-Sided

Enl

arge

men

t

Function intend to set

Combination available

Combination unavailable

Priority to latter-set mode

Priority to Image Combination,Image Separation, and Booklet mode (Ratio can be changed)

✕

▲

●

Zoo

m D

esig

natio

n

Fu

nct

ion

alr

ead

y se

t

XY

Zoo

mA

uto

Zoo

m m

ode

Zoo

m P

rogr

amE

ntire

Imag

eA

utom

atic

Exp

osur

e C

ontr

ol

Res

erve

Cop

y

Boo

k 2

-Sid

ed

2 1

-Sid

ed

2 2

-Sid

ed

1 2

-Sid

ed

Inte

rrup

t Cop

y

Hol

e P

unch

Sad

dle

Stit

ch

Sta

ple

Offs

et G

roup

Offs

et C

olla

te

Rot

ate

Gro

upin

g

Rot

ate

Col

latin

g

Gro

up

Col

late

Sta

ck B

ypas

s

Aut

o D

raw

er S

witc

hing

Auto

mat

ic Pa

per S

electi

on, A

uto

Orien

tatio

n

Aut

omat

ic P

aper

Sel

ectio

n

Tex

t/Pho

to

Tex

t

Pho

to

Prin

ted

Imag

e

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

✕

✕

*1

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

✕

▲

*1

✕

✕

✕

✕

▲

*1

✕

✕

✕

*1 *1

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

✕

✕

*1*1*1

*1*1

*1▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

✕

✕

*1▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

✕

✕

*1▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

*1▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

*1▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

*1▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

✕

✕

*1▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

▲

✕

✕

*1 *1

▲

▲

▲

*1

▲

▲

▲

✕

▲

▲

▲

*1

✕

▲

▲

▲

*1

*1 You cannot combine these modes when free size is selected.

Chart of Available Combination of Functions11-10

App

endi

x11


Two-page SeparationImage CombinationImage SeparationOriginal Frame Erase Book Frame Erase Binding Erase Right MarginLeft MarginTop MarginBottom MarginShiftFront CoverSheet Insertion (Printed/Blank)Chapter PageTransparency InterleavingBookletBooklet/ Saddle StitchFront Cover (Printed/Blank)Sample SetDifferent Size OriginalsJob BuildSharpnessNega/PosiImage RepeatMirror Image

Enl

arge

men

tZ

oom

Des

igna

tion

XY

Zoo

mA

uto

Zoo

m m

ode

Zoo

m P

rogr

amE

ntire

Imag

eA

utom

atic

Exp

osur

e C

ontr

ol

Res

erve

Cop

y

Boo

k 2

-Sid

ed

2 1

-Sid

ed

2 2

-Sid

ed

1 2

-Sid

ed

Inte

rrup

t Cop

y

Sta

ple

Sad

dle

Stit

chH

ole

Pun

ch

Offs

et G

roup

Offs

et C

olla

te

Rot

ate

Gro

upin

g

Rot

ate

Col

latin

g

Gro

up

Col

late

Sta

ck B

ypas

s

Aut

o D

raw

er S

witc

hing

Auto

mat

ic Pa

per S

electi

on, A

uto

Orien

tatio

n

Aut

omat

ic P

aper

Sel

ectio

n

Tex

t/Pho

to

Tex

t

Pho

to

Prin

ted

Imag

e





✕

▲

●


Fu

nct

ion

alr

ead

y se

t●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

✕

●

●

●

●

●

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

▲

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

*4*4*4

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

*4*4*4

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

*1*1*1

*1*1*1*1✕

*1*1*1

*1

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

*2 *3

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

*2 You can set the Sample Set mode as the Interrupt mode.*3 You can set the Sample Set mode as the Reserve Copy mode.*4 You cannot combine these modes when the Different Size Originals mode is set.

Chart of Available Combination of Functions 11-11

11A

ppen

dix


EnlargementZoom DesignationXY ZoomAuto Zoom modeZoom ProgramEntire ImageAutomatic Exposure ControlPrinted ImagePhotoTextText/PhotoAutomatic Paper SelectionAutomatic Paper Selection, Auto OrientationAuto Drawer SwitchingStack BypassCollateGroupRotate CollatingRotate GroupingOffset CollateOffset GroupStaple CollateSaddle StitchHole PunchInterrupt CopyReserve Copy1 2-Sided2 2-Sided2 1-SidedBook 2-Sided

●

●

●

●

✕

✕

✕

*1

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

●

●

●

●

✕

✕

✕

*1

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕ ✕ ✕

✕

*4*4

*1

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

*4*4

*1

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

*4*4

*1

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

●

●

●

●

✕

✕

✕

*1✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

●

●

●

●

✕

✕

✕

*1✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

●

●

●

●

✕

✕

✕

*1✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

*5*6

✕

✕

*1

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

*1

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

Tw

o-pa

ge S

epar

atio

n





✕

▲

●

Imag

e C

ombi

natio

nIm

age

Sep

arat

ion

Orig

inal

Fra

me

Era

se

Boo

k F

ram

e E

rase

B

indi

ng E

rase

Neg

a/P

osi

Imag

e R

epea

tM

irror

Imag

e

Sha

rpne

ss

Job

Bui

ld

Diff

eren

t Siz

e O

rigin

als

Sam

ple

Set

Fro

nt C

over

(P

rinte

d/B

lank

)

Boo

klet

/ Sad

dle

Stit

ch

Boo

klet

Tra

nspa

renc

y In

terle

avin

g

Cha

pter

Pag

e

She

et In

sert

ion

(Prin

ted/

Bla

nk)

Fro

nt C

over

Shi

ft

Bot

tom

Mar

gin

Top

Mar

gin

Left

Mar

gin

Rig

ht M

argi

n


Fu

nct

ion

alr

ead

y se

t

▲

*1

*5 You cannot make Interrupt copy while copying with the Sample Set mode, nor while changing the settings after the Sample Set has been made.

*6 You cannot reserve a copy job while copying with the Sample Set mode, nor while chang-ing the settings after the Sample Set has been made.


App

endi

x11


Two-page SeparationImage CombinationImage SeparationOriginal Frame Erase Book Frame Erase Binding Erase Right MarginLeft MarginTop MarginBottom MarginShiftFront CoverSheet Insertion (Printed/Blank)Chapter PageTransparency InterleavingBookletBooklet/ Saddle StitchFront Cover (Printed/Blank)Sample SetDifferent Size OriginalsJob BuildSharpnessNega/PosiImage RepeatMirror Image

✕

✕

✕

✕

▲

✕

✕

✕

✕

▲

▲

▲

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

▲

▲

✕

✕

✕

✕

▲

▲

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

▲

▲

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

▲

▲

▲

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

▲

▲

▲

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

▲

▲

▲

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

▲

▲

▲

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

▲

*7

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

▲

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

▲

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

▲

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

*7

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

Tw

o-pa

ge S

epar

atio

nIm

age

Com

bina

tion

Imag

e S

epar

atio

nO

rigin

al F

ram

e E

rase

B

ook

Fra

me

Era

se

Bin

ding

Era

se

Neg

a/P

osi

Imag

e R

epea

tM

irror

Imag

e

Sha

rpne

ss

Job

Bui

ld

Diff

eren

t Siz

e O

rigin

als

Sam

ple

Set

Add

Cov

er (

Prin

ted/

Bla

nk)

Boo

klet

/ Sad

dle

Stit

ch

Boo

klet

Tra

nspa

renc

y In

terle

avin

g

Cha

pter

Pag

e

She

et In

sert

ion

(Prin

ted/

Bla

nk)

Fro

nt C

over

Shi

ft

Bot

tom

Mar

gin

Top

Mar

gin

Left

Mar

gin

Rig

ht M

argi

n





✕

▲

●


Fu

nct

ion

alr

ead

y se

t

*7 You cannot combine these modes when the automatic paper selection is selected. When selecting the paper manually, you can combine these modes.

Chart of Available Combination of Functions 11-13

11A

ppen

dix


Mail Box Function

Platen glass scanningFeeder scanning Document size Auto SelectDocument size Manual SelectRecord size Auto SelectRecord size Manual SelectEnlargementZoom DesignationXY ZoomAuto ZoomZoom ProgramAutomatic Exposure ControlPhoto mode/ Printed ImagePhoto mode/ PhotoTextText/Photo1-Sided Scanning2-Sided ScanningTwo-page SeparationImage CombinationOriginal Frame Erase Book Frame Erase Binding Erase Booklet ScanningDifferent Size OriginalsJob BuildSharpnessNega/Posi

*8*8

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

▲

▲

▲

▲

●

●

✕

▲

▲

▲

▲

●

●

✕

▲

▲

▲

▲

●

●

✕

✕

▲

▲

▲

▲

✕

▲

▲

▲

▲

●

●

✕

▲

▲

▲

▲

✕

▲

▲

▲

▲

✕

▲

▲

▲

▲

✕

▲

▲

▲

▲

✕

▲

▲

▲

▲

✕

▲

✕

▲

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

●

●

●

●

✕

✕

✕

✕

▲

✕

✕

✕

✕

▲

▲

✕

✕

✕

✕

▲

▲

✕

✕

✕

✕

▲

▲

✕

✕

✕

●

●

●

●

▲

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕

✕ ✕ ✕

Pla

ten

glas

s sc

anni

ngF

eede

r sc

anni

ng

Doc

umen

t siz

e A

uto

Sel

ect

Doc

umen

t siz

e M

anua

l Sel

ect

Rec

ord

size

Aut

o S

elec

tR

ecor

d si

ze M

anua

l Sel

ect

Enl

arge

men

t

Boo

klet

Sca

nnin

g

Neg

a/P

osi

Sha

rpne

ss

Job

Bui

ld

Diff

eren

t Siz

e O

rigin

als

Bin

ding

Era

se

Boo

k F

ram

e E

rase

Orig

inal

Fra

me

Era

se

Imag

e C

ombi

natio

n

Tw

o-pa

ge S

epar

atio

n

2-S

ided

Sca

nnin

g

1-S

ided

Sca

nnin

g

Tex

t/Pho

to

Tex

t

Pho

to m

ode/

Pho

to

Pho

to m

ode/

Prin

ted

Imag

e

Aut

omat

ic E

xpos

ure

Con

trol

Zoo

m P

rogr

am

Aut

o Z

oom

XY

Zoo

m

Zoo

m D

esig

natio

n





✕

▲

●

Function intend to setF

un

ctio

n a

lrea

dy

set

*8 You can combine these modes when the Job Build mode is set.



Index

App

endi

x11

1 to 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-381 to 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-392 On 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-334 On 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-338 On 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-341 2-Sided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-382 1-Sided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-432 2-Sided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40

AA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35, 4-14Adding Toner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Additional Functions Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Additional Functions key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Additional Functions Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Adjusting a Paper Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Adjustment/Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31Audible Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Auto. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20, 4-15Auto Clear Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Auto Collate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37Auto Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40Auto Paper Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Auto Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Auto Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Auto XY Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

BBack Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Basic Features Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Binding Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31, 4-35Black toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Book Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28, 4-34Book 2-Sided . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45Booklet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9, 4-72Booklet Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29Box Selection Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Index 11-15

11A

ppen

dix


Box Set/ Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

CCancel Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Card Reader-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Change Auto Clear Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27Change Auto Sleep Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26Clear key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Clip holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Collate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Control Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Control panel power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Copy Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32COPY key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Copy Ratio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16, 4-15Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37Copy Tray-C3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Counter Check key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Cover/Job Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69Cover/Sheet Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

DDaily Timer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29Dark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32, 4-12Date & Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24Department ID Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58Device Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72Device Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Different Size Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43, 4-43Display contrast dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Document Size Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Done Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10Duplexing Transport unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Index11-16

App

endi

x11


EEnergy Consumption in Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15Energy Saver key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Energy Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14Entire Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Error indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

FFeeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Feeder Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30Feeder cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Finisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48, 4-63Finisher-F1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Fixing Transport unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24, 4-29Front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3Function Key Wake Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

GGroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48Guide Function Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Guide key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

HHole Punch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50

IID key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Image Combination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33, 4-37Image Orientation Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38Image Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62Image Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38Inch Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Initial Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Initialize Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23Initialize Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45Interrupt key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Interrupt Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Index 11-17

11A

ppen

dix


JJob Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45, 4-45Job Duration Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39

LLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32, 4-12Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Low-Power Mode Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30LTRR/ STMT Original Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

MMAIL BOX key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Mail Box Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46Main Power indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Main power switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Manual Paper Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Merge Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63Mirror Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65Mode Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48, 4-51, 4-77

NNega/Posi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-60, 4-47Next Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Non-collate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49Numeric keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

OOK key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Original Frame Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26, 4-30Original output area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Original supply tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Index11-18

App

endi

x11


PPaper Deck-G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Paper drawer 1, 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Paper drawer 3, 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Paper Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Paper stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33, 4-13Photo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41Platen glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3Preset Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16, 4-15Printed Img. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33, 4-13Printing Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18Priority Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Processing/Data indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Puncher Unit-B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

RRear side of platen glass cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58Report Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75Reserve Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Reserve Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Reset key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Right cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50

SSaddle Finisher-F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32Sample Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88Sample Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54SCAN key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Secured Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Self-diagnostic (Error) Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32Service Call Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37Setting Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56Sharpness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67, 4-49Shift. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Index 11-19

11A

ppen

dix


Slide guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Special Features Screen 1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Special Features Screen 2/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2Stack bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2StackBypass Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Standard Key Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35Standard Local Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21Standard Scan Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52Standard Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42Standard Stack Bypass Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19Staple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49Start key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Stop key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Store Paper Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12System Manager Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55System Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13System Monitor Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55

TText . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33, 4-13Text/Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33, 4-13Time Until Unit Quiets Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28Timer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24Toner supply cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3Transparency Interleaving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Tray Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17Two-page Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2, 4-27Two-sided Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38Two-sided Originals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23Two-sided Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67

UUser’s Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75

WWire Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31

Index11-20

App

endi

x11


XXY Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25, 4-21

ZZoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24, 4-20Zoom Designation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18, 4-16Zoom Fine Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31Zoom Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23, 4-20

Index 11-21


✂✂

✂✂

✂✂

E82_US.book Page i Tuesday, May 22, 2001 12:11 AM

System Management Mode of the imageRUNNER 5000 Series
The following pages regarding the use and operations of the System Management mode, should be cut out of the manual by the supervisor or the system manager.
You can set restrictions to the System Settings of the Additional Functions or manage the settings set by other users by setting the System Settings of the Additional Functions. This mode is call the System Management mode.The operations which can be done in the System Management mode are as follows:• Box Document Management• Box Setting Management

Entering the System Management Mode

■ When Department ID Management is Enabled

Enter the System Manager ID in the [Depart-ment ID], and the System Password in the [Password] with the Numeric keys ( - ), and press the key.

The machine enters the System Management Mode.

■ When Department ID Management is not Enabled

1 Press the key.

0 9

ID

?

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0ID

9

C

Reset

Guide


Interrupt Cle


i

✂

✂

✂

✂

✂

✂

E82_US.book Page ii Tuesday, May 22, 2001 12:11 AM

2 Press the [System Settings] key.

3 Enter the System Manager ID/ Password with the Numeric keys ( - ), and press the key.


NOTE• Enter the number stored under System Manager

Settings. (See “Setting/ Changing the System Man-ager ID and Password,” on p. 6-55.)

Canceling the System Management Mode

Press the key.

The System Management Mode is canceled.

NOTE• The System Management Mode is also canceled

even when Auto Clear has taken place. The display returns to the screen of the function selected in the Auto Clear Setting.

0 9 ID

?

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0ID

9

C

Guide


Interrupt

Error

Clear

Processing/Data

ID

ii

✂✂

✂✂

✂✂

E82_US.book Page iii Tuesday, May 22, 2001 12:11 AM

Managing Box in the System Management ModeYou can operate the box documents stored by the users. For example, you can operate a box that the user has forgotten the password, erase unnecessary documents, or in case of need, access to box documents of other users.

1 Enter the System Management Mode.

2 Press the key.

3 Proceed to operate the box.

(See Chapter 4 “Using the Mail Box Functions.”)

?

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0ID

9

C

Reset

Guide


Interrupt Cle

COPY MAIL BOX SCAN

MAIL BOX

iii

✂

✂

✂

✂

✂

✂

E82_US.book Page iv Tuesday, May 22, 2001 12:11 AM

Changing the Box Settings in the System Management ModeYou can change the box settings restricted with a password. For example, you can initialize unnecessary box, or change the name of the box.

1 Press the key.

NOTE• When the machine is already in the System Man-

agement mode, press the key and proceed to step 5.

When Department ID Management is enabled, enter the System Manager ID in the [Department ID], and the System Password in the [Password], with the Numeric keys ( - ), and press the

key.

2 Press the [System Settings] key.

?

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8

0ID

9

C

Reset

Guide


Interrupt Cle



0 9

ID

iv

✂✂

✂✂

✂✂

E82_US.book Page v Tuesday, May 22, 2001 12:11 AM

3 Enter the System Manager ID/ Password with the Numeric keys ( - ), and press the key.


NOTE• Enter the number stored under System Manager

Settings. (See “Setting/ Changing the System Man-ager ID and Password,” on p. 6-55.)


The display returns to the Additional Functions screen.

5 Press the [Mail Box Settings] key, and change the settings.

(See “Setting Specifications of the Mail Box Function (Mail Box Settings),” on p. 6-46.)

0 9 ID

v

E82_US.book Page vi Tuesday, May 22, 2001 12:11 AM

✂✂

✂✂

✂✂

E82_US.book Page vii Tuesday, May 22, 2001 12:11 AM

Check Sheet for the Periodic Inspection of the BreakerThis page should be cut out of the user’s guide and copied for future use.After cutting out of the user’s guide, store this page in a safe place near the machine.

■ How to Inspect the Breaker periodicallyFollow the procedure described in the “Periodic Inspection of the Breaker” on p. 26 of theimageRUNNER 5000 Series User’s Guide, once or twice a month.

■ How to Fill in this Check SheetFill in the date of inspection, and the name of inspector.When the inspection finished normally, write a check mark under “OK”.If not, contact your service representative. (Also write a check mark under “NG”.)

Date ofInspection Inspector

ResultOK NG

Date ofInspection Inspector

ResultOK NG

Canon ImageRUNNER 5000 User Guide

Documents

copy printer

breathtaking beauty serve

worlds coral reefs

brilliantly colored fish

plugs metal pins

tropical paradise filled

thermal transfer printer

pdl printer kit